diff options
Diffstat (limited to '25334.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 25334.txt | 8252 |
1 files changed, 8252 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/25334.txt b/25334.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..23fc7e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/25334.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8252 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Deerfoot in The Mountains, by Edward S. Ellis + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Deerfoot in The Mountains + +Author: Edward S. Ellis + +Illustrator: J. Steeple Davis + +Release Date: May 5, 2008 [EBook #25334] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK DEERFOOT IN THE MOUNTAINS *** + + + + +Produced by David Edwards and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was +produced from images generously made available by The +Internet Archive) + + + + + + +[Illustration: DEERFOOT IN THE MOUNTAINS] + +[Illustration: A Friend in Need.] + + + + +NEW DEERFOOT SERIES + + +Deerfoot in the Mountains + + + +BY + +EDWARD S. ELLIS + +_Author of "Deerfoot in the Forest," "Deerfoot on the +Prairies," "An American King," "The Cromwell of +Virginia," "The Boy Pioneer Series," "Log Cabin +Series," Etc., Etc._ + + +Illustrated + +with Eight Engravings by J. Steeple Davis + + + +PHILADELPHIA: +THE JOHN C. WINSTON CO. +1905 + + + + +THE NEW DEERFOOT SERIES + +BY + +EDWARD S. ELLIS + +Illustrated by +J. STEEPLE DAVIS + +_No. 1.--Deerfoot in the Forest_ +_No. 2.--Deerfoot on the Prairies_ +_No. 3.--Deerfoot in the Mountains_ + + +Each contains seven half-tone engravings and _color frontispiece_. They +make more real the fortunes and adventures of the heroic little band +that journeys through the wilderness and prairies from the Ohio to the +Pacific. It was in the time of daring when Lewis and Clark were engaged +in their thrilling expedition that the adventures narrated by the +distinguished author of boys' books are described as occurring. Our old +friends, George and Victor, of the "Log Cabin Series," are again met +with in these pages, and the opportunity of once more coming face to +face with Deerfoot will be welcomed by every juvenile reader. + +_The New Deerfoot Series is bound in uniform style in cloth, with side +and back stamped in colors._ + +Price, single volume $1.00 + +Price, per set of three volumes, in attractive box 3.00 + +COPYRIGHT BY +THE JOHN C. WINSTON CO., 1905 + + + + +CONTENTS + + + PAGE + +CHAP. I. EASTWARD BOUND 9 + +CHAP. II. LOST, STRAYED OR STOLEN 23 + +CHAP. III. THE TRAIL NORTHWARD 37 + +CHAP. IV. THE LAND OF THE ASSINIBOINES 51 + +CHAP. V. A WELCOME SIGHT 65 + +CHAP. VI. COMRADES TRUE 79 + +CHAP. VII. A MISHAP 93 + +CHAP. VIII. ENEMIES AND FRIENDS 106 + +CHAP. IX. IN THE ROCKIES 121 + +CHAP. X. IN THE BLACKFOOT COUNTRY 135 + +CHAP. XI. IN WINTER QUARTERS 149 + +CHAP. XII. BLACKFOOT CITIZENS 161 + +CHAP. XIII. SUMMONED TO COURT 173 + +CHAP. XIV. A NEW BLACKFOOT CITIZEN 185 + +CHAP. XV. THE SPIRIT CIRCLE 197 + +CHAP. XVI. THE FIELD OF HONOR 211 + +CHAP. XVII. A MEMORABLE DUEL 221 + +CHAP. XVIII. DISCIPLINE IN THE RANKS 234 + +CHAP. XIX. "BEHOLD HE PRAYETH" 245 + +CHAP. XX. LIGHT IN DARKNESS 258 + +CHAP. XXI. HOMEWARD BOUND 267 + +CHAP. XXII. A MEMORABLE MEETING 280 + +CHAP. XXIII. LEWIS AND CLARK'S EXPEDITIONS 292 + +CHAP. XXIV. OVERBOARD 304 + +CHAP. XXV. JACK HALLOWAY AGAIN 315 + +CHAP. XXVI. A TEMPERANCE AGITATOR 329 + +CHAP. XXVII. "GOOD-BYE" 343 + +CHAP. XXVIII. RETROSPECT 350 + + + + +ILLUSTRATIONS + + + PAGE + +FRONTISPIECE: (COLOR PLATE) A FRIEND IN NEED + +"THIS HORSE WAS WHIRLWIND" 72 + +"NOW, WHIRLWIND, RUN HIM DOWN" 112 + +DEERFOOT LOST IN REVERIE BY THE CAMP FIRE 136 + +AN OMINOUS INTERVIEW 177 + +A MEMORABLE DUEL 224 + +A VISIT FROM CAPTAINS LEWIS AND CLARK 289 + +"IT WAS DEERFOOT, THE SHAWANOE" 301 + + + + +Deerfoot in the Mountains + + + + +CHAPTER I. + +EASTWARD BOUND. + + +Deerfoot the Shawanoe, Mul-tal-la the Blackfoot, and the twin brothers, +George and Victor Shelton, had completed their long journey from the +Ohio River to the Pacific slope, and, standing on an elevation near the +Columbia, spent hours in looking out upon the face of the mightiest +ocean of the globe. They feasted their vision on the magnificent scene, +with the miles of wilderness, mountain, vale, river and Indian villages +spread between their feet and the ocean. + +It was a picture worth journeying across the continent to see. From +beyond the convex world a ship had sailed up to view, its snowy sails +looking at first like a tiny but growing cloud in the soft sky. As the +craft drew steadily nearer, they saw it careening to one side under the +impulse of the wind against the bellying canvas, while the curling foam +at the bows spread out like a fan and dissolved in the clear waters +beyond the stern. + +Deerfoot had taken the glass after Mul-tal-la was through, and he stood +for a long time gazing at the waste of waters. None spoke, for there +was that in the scene and the occasion which made all thoughtful. The +grandeur, the majesty, the vastness filled them with awe and held them +mute. Finally, the Shawanoe lowered the instrument, and turning toward +the boys, said gravely, as he pointed first to the east and then to the +west: + +"Yonder is the endless forest of wood, and yonder the endless forest of +water; they shall all become the home of the white man." + +"I don't doubt you are right," replied George Shelton, "but it will be +hundreds of years after you and I are dead; there is room between here +and the Ohio for millions upon millions, but where will they come +from?" + +"The white men will become like the leaves in the forest and the sands +on the seashore; no one can count the numbers that will overspread the +land; they will be everywhere." + +"And what of your own people, Deerfoot?" asked Victor. + +The dusky youth shook his head, as if the problem was beyond him. + +"The two ought to live in peace side by side, for such is the will of +the Great Spirit. The white man cannot become like the red man, but the +red man may grow into the ways of the pale-faces, and all may be +brothers, and so live till time shall be no more." + +The theme was too profound for the youths, though it was manifest that +the Shawanoe had given much thought to it. He added nothing, and while +the day was young they walked back to the Columbia, re-entered the +canoe and headed up stream. + +Henceforward their work was different from that which they faced when +descending the river. There were long stretches where, despite the +current, the dusky boatmen found no special trouble in driving the +craft eastward; but, as they progressed, the labor became severer, for +the stream narrowed and the velocity of its flow became greater. The +portages were long and toilsome, and, as the party advanced, many +places were met where these portages became necessary on account of the +rapidity of the current alone. All, however, bent resolutely to work, +Victor and George taxing their strength to the utmost. Deerfoot seemed +tireless, but he could never be inconsiderate to others. He could have +outworn Mul-tal-la, though not till after the exhaustion of the boys, +who agreed between themselves that the job was the biggest they had +ever tackled; and yet their adult companions not only did the work the +twins were doing, but swung the paddles in addition. + +Our friends stayed one night at the Echeloot or Upper Chinook village, +which they had visited when coming down the river. You will remember +that it was there they first saw wooden houses made by Indians. The +explorers were treated as hospitably as before, but, as you will also +recall, the natives were Flatheads, and the sight of the misshapen +skulls, towering at the rear like the ridge of a roof, was so +disagreeable that the travelers were glad to turn their backs upon +them. + +You have not forgotten the thrilling descent of the Falls of the +Columbia, where all the skill of Deerfoot and Mul-tal-la was needed to +save the canoe from being dashed upon the rocks. + +"Are you going to paddle through them again?" asked Victor. + +"Deerfoot does not wish to see his brother scared so bad as he was +before." + +"I was about to say that if you and Mul-tal-la don't feel equal to the +task, George and I are ready to take it off your hands." + +"The heart of Deerfoot is made glad to hear the words of his brother," +replied the Shawanoe, handing his paddle to the youth. Not expecting +that, Victor scratched his head and looked quizzically at George. + +"Shall we show those fellows how to do such things?" + +"I don't think it is worth while; they won't appreciate it." + +"Deerfoot is sorry," was all that was said by the Shawanoe, as the boat +was drawn out of the waters and hoisted upon the shoulders of the +party. + +The Shawanoe gave another illustration of his stern principles when, at +the close of day, the canoe was run into shore at the point where the +travelers had encamped beside the pile of lumber from which they were +led to take what fuel they needed through the misrepresentation of the +three Indians who called upon them. The night was one of the coldest of +several weeks, and at their elbows, as may be said, was enough fuel to +make them comfortable for months. + +The brothers looked longingly at the mass of lumber, but did not dare +touch it in the presence of their friend. + +"I wonder if we can't persuade him to look the other way for a little +while," said Victor in a low tone to George. + +"It wouldn't make any difference if he did--he would see us just the +same; the only thing to do is to appeal to his common sense." + +"You try it; he won't pay any attention to me." + +"See here," said the shivering lad; "it seems to me, Deerfoot, that +since we have already stolen some lumber from that pile, it can't be +any harm to steal a little more; you see, with your good sense, that it +will be only taking two bites from the same apple." + +The Shawanoe looked gravely at his young friends, whom no one +understood better than he, and abruptly asked: + +"How much do two and two make?" + +"As near as I can figure out," interposed Victor, "the answer to that +problem is four." + +"When we used the wood we thought we had the right to take it; we +should pay the owner if we could find him. If we use any of it now it +will be a sin, as sure as two and two make four, for we know it belongs +to another; it is better to freeze than to steal wood. Deerfoot does +not wish to hear his brothers say anything more." + +"I suppose he is right," growled Victor, "but doesn't he draw it mighty +fine? We may as well prepare to spend one of the worst nights we have +had since leaving the Ohio." + +The canoe was drawn up the bank and then turned over, so as to shield +the property beneath. Then the blankets were spread so that the four +lay near one another and thus secured mutual warmth. The region had +become familiar to our friends because of their former visit, and they +knew that all the natives were friendly. Deerfoot, therefore, said +there was no need of mounting guard. They had eaten enough dried salmon +to stay the pangs of hunger, though the boys would have relished +something warm and more palatable. + +All slept soundly, and the night passed without the slightest +disturbance from prowling man or animal. Victor Shelton was the first +to awake. He was lying on his side with his back against that of his +brother, and his face so covered by his blanket that only a small +orifice was left through which to breathe. His first sensation was that +of pressure, as if a heavy weight was distributed over the blanket and +was bearing him down. He moved his arm and found that the blanket, from +some cause, was really heavier than usual. A vigorous flirt freed his +shoulder from the wrapping, and he then saw the cause of the peculiar +feeling he had noticed: the earth was covered with several inches of +snow. Anyone coming upon the camp in the gray light of morning would +have noted nothing but the mass of lumber, the flowing river, the +overturned canoe and several white mounds. The snowfall had ceased, and +fortunately there had been a considerable rise of temperature. The snow +was soft and wet, and one could move about without extra protection, +and not suffer from cold. + +Victor lay still for a minute or two, engaged in thinking. Then he +gently pushed the blanket off his shoulder and body, so as to leave his +limbs free. With the same stealth he rose to his feet and looked +around. There lay his three friends, encased even to their heads and +feet in the warm protection. + +"I think there couldn't be a better time for me to settle my accounts +with you fellows," muttered the lad, looking down on the mounds. + +"Master George Shelton, you have a bad habit of making slurring remarks +about my walking pretty fast from the wounded antelope, forgetting that +by doing so I drew him on to his own destruction. You need a lesson and +I'm going to give it to you. + +"Mr. Mul-tal-la, you didn't say much at the time I was explaining that +little matter to George, but I saw the grin on your face, and I knew +you were thinking a good deal more than you had any right to think. You +need to be taught better manners. + +"As for you, Mr. Deerfoot, you are the worst of all. I can't forget the +scandalous tricks you have played on me. It will take a long time to +even matters between us, but I'm going to make a good start to-day." + +Knowing how lightly the Shawanoe slept, Victor picked his way with +great skill until he had taken a dozen or more steps. The down-like +carpet enabled him to do this absolutely without noise, a fact which +explains why Deerfoot did not awake. + +Victor now stooped and began silently manufacturing snowballs. He +packed the soft substance as hard as he could while circling it about +in his palms and rounding it into shape. When the missile suggested a +12-pound shot he laid it at his feet, with the whispered words: + +"That's for you, Master George Shelton." + +The second sphere was compressed and modeled with the same pains and +placed beside the first. + +"That's for you, Mr. Mul-tal-la, and you're going to get it good! As +for you, Mr. Deerfoot, you shall have a double dose." + +Crooking his left arm at the elbow, Victor laid three of the nicely +molded snowballs in the hollow, which served as a quiver serves for +arrows. The fourth missile was grasped in his right hand, and he drew +it slowly back and sighted carefully at his brother. Victor was a fine +thrower, and when the ball flashed from his hand it landed on the top +of George's cap and burst into fragments. The sleeper was in the midst +of a dream in which Zigzag played a leading part, and the youth's first +impression was that he had received the full force of a kick on his +crown. + +Paying no further attention to him, Victor quickly let fly at +Mul-tal-la, and the throw was as good as the first. + +The disturbance, slight as it was, roused Deerfoot, who flung the +blanket off his face and raised his head. He was just in time to +receive the compact sphere between the eyes, and before he could dodge +the second it landed on his ear, packed the passage full of snow and +plastered the side of his face with the snowy particles. + +"I meant those for you and here's another!" shouted Victor, who, having +exhausted his ammunition, snatched up a handful of snow and began +hastily molding a new missile. + +"You needn't scramble and claw about! I've got you down and I'm going +to pay you for beating me at wrestling, for tickling my nose, for +stealing my clothes when I was swimming, and"---- + +The reason why the lad ceased his remarks so abruptly was because a +snowball, fired as if from a cannon, crashed into his mouth that +instant and half strangled him. Before he could pull himself together +he knew his nose was flattened by another missile and Deerfoot was on +the point of launching a third shot. This was more than Victor had +bargained for, and, wheeling, he "ran for life," yelling at the top of +his voice for George and Mul-tal-la to come to his help. + +"Soak him, George! Give it to him, Mul-tal-la; don't you see he's +killing me?" + +Now, there was no reason why the two thus appealed to should heed the +prayer, since each had suffered at the hands of the youth who was in +extremity. Nevertheless, Mul-tal-la and George attacked Deerfoot, +observing which, Victor was unprincipled enough to turn back and join +the assailants. Thus the Shawanoe was forced to defend himself against +three, every one of whom was a good thrower. Right bravely did the +dusky youth do his work--never yielding an inch, but driving his +missiles right and left, with the merciless accuracy and the power of +an arrow from his bow, or a bullet from his rifle. So lightning-like +were his throws that neither the man nor the boys were able to dodge +them, unless they widened the space between themselves and their +master. Deerfoot's last missile cracked like a pistol when the ball +impinged against the side of Mul-tal-la's head, and the latter gave up +the contest. + +This left only the boys. The Shawanoe hastily fashioned a couple of +balls, and with one in either hand started for the brothers, who called +out, "Enough!" and flung their own ammunition to the ground in token of +surrender. He looked from one to the other and said: + +"Let us not stop; Deerfoot is beginning to like it." + +"That's the trouble," replied George; "you like it too much; I don't +want any more; maybe Victor does." + +"I'll do my own talking," replied the latter; "didn't you see me throw +down my snowball? What do you 'spose I did that for?" + +"Didn't you throw it at Deerfoot?" asked the Shawanoe. "The shot came +as near hitting him as some of those you threw." + +"We'll take up the fight again some time," was the vague promise of +Victor, panting from his exertion. + +"Deerfoot hopes you will do so." + +But the good-natured contest was never renewed. Not again could the +lads expect to have such a golden opportunity, and their defeat was so +decisive that they knew better than to repeat it. + +The labor of the return grew heavier as they progressed, and the time +came when it was so hard to make headway against the powerful current +that the effort was given up. The last few miles became a real portage, +though when our friends were descending the river the passage could not +have been easier. + +And so in due time the four reached the Nez Perce village, where they +had left their horses and some of their property. Henceforth the +journey to the Blackfoot country was to be made by land. The former +task had proved one of the severest of their lives, and glad indeed +were all when it was over. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +LOST, STRAYED OR STOLEN. + + +You have already learned something of the Nez Perces, who in our times +have produced one of the greatest Indian leaders of the past century. +He was Chief Joseph, who gave the United States regulars such a +brilliant campaign as to excite their admiration. Perhaps you saw the +aged chief on his visit to the East a short time since. He was +chivalrous, high-minded and a loyal friend of the whites, and showed +this when he handed his rifle to Colonel Miles and said: "From where +the sun stands in yonder heavens, I fight the white man no more." + +You will recall that the Nez Perces are large, fine-looking men, of +dark complexion, and that the women have attractive features. A century +ago they had a rough time of it. They were forced to work hard during +the summer and autumn in gathering salmon and their winter supply of +edible roots. In winter they hunted deer on snow shoes, and, as spring +advanced, crossed the mountains to the headwaters of the Missouri to +traffic in buffalo robes. You will see, therefore, that they were kept +unusually busy, and red men have never shown a fondness for manual +labor. But, beside this, they had numerous fights with enemies from the +west, often losing some of their warriors and many of their horses. + +At the time of the visit by our friends, Amokeat was principal chief of +the Nez Perces. He and Mul-tal-la the Blackfoot were attached to each +other, and the confidence of the latter in the dusky leader was +complete. Had he not been so warm in his expressions of this faith in +Amokeat, Deerfoot would never have left the stallion Whirlwind in his +care while the explorers were pressing their way down the Columbia to +tidewater. + +As it was, the Shawanoe was troubled by misgivings from the hour he +parted company with his matchless steed. As the distance between him +and the Nez Perce village lessened, it was hard for the dusky youth to +suppress his nervousness. He was reserved, speaking only now and then +when necessary, and unconsciously hurrying his footsteps, until the +brothers were ready to drop from exhaustion. Had the village been a +mile farther off they would have been obliged to beg for rest. + +The arrival of the party caused less excitement than would be supposed. +The majority of the men and women were away, assisting in the +harvesting of salmon, while fully a score of the ablest warriors were +off somewhere in the mountains, either hunting or scouting, preparatory +to some movement the Nez Perces as a tribe had in view. There were +enough on hand, however, to give our friends due attention and to +welcome them back. + +The first inquiry of Deerfoot was as to the horses. To the south of the +main village stretched an expanse of undergrowth, bushes, succulent +grass and herbage, where the animals of the tribe were turned loose to +roam at will when not needed by their owners. The Nez Perces, with +gestures and the few words that were understood by Mul-tal-la, said the +horses of their visitors would be found at the place described. It was +not far off, and Deerfoot broke into a lope, his friends at his heels. + +It required but a few minutes to reach the tract, which covered a +number of acres. At different points glimpses were caught of horses +cropping the grass and herbage. The first animal recognized was Zigzag, +who was so near that the moment the party debouched into the space he +raised his head, looked at them and gave a neigh of recognition. Then +he resumed his grazing, as if he felt that he had done all the honors +due from him. + +"Yonder is Prince!" exclaimed Victor, running forward to greet his +horse, while George Shelton began searching hither and yon for Jack. +Mul-tal-la did not see Bug, and showed more interest in Deerfoot's +search than in his own animal. + +The Shawanoe had halted on the edge of the pasturage ground, glanced +quickly over his field of vision, and then, placing a thumb and +forefinger between his teeth, he emitted a blast like that of a steam +whistle. It was a signal he had taught the stallion, and he knew that +if the horse was within a mile he would come toward him on a full +gallop. Deerfoot repeated the call twice and then waited and looked and +listened. None of the horses so much as raised his head, and the heart +of the youth became like lead. + +"Whirlwind is not here," he said sadly to the Blackfoot. George and +Victor hurried back, drawn by the signal whose meaning they understood. +In truth, when they left his side it had been more for the purpose of +hunting for the stallion than for their own animals. Their hearts ached +for Deerfoot, whose face was the picture of disappointment and grief. + +"Call to him again," suggested George. + +"It can do no good. If he is near he would have heard Deerfoot; he is +gone." + +"He may have wandered beyond reach of your signal," said Victor. "You +know he never felt friendly toward other horses and always kept by +himself." + +With a weak hope that his friend was right, Deerfoot walked a hundred +yards to where an uprooted tree lay on its side, climbed upon the +trunk, and, facing the different points of the compass in turn, +whistled so shrilly that in the afternoon stillness the sound awoke the +echoes for miles in every direction. Then he stood in the attitude of +intense attention. Certain that the stallion had not gone far of his +own accord, he knew these calls would bring him dashing to the spot, +provided no person had had a hand in his disappearance. + +But the minutes passed without anything of this nature occurring, and +the Shawanoe sprang down from the slight elevation and came back to +where his sympathizing friends awaited him. They were silent, for none +could say aught to comfort him. + +"We will look for Amokeat," he quietly remarked, leading the way to the +village. There the inquiries of Mul-tal-la brought the first definite +information of the missing horse. It was of anything but a pleasant +nature. + +It has been said that about a score of Nez Perce warriors were absent +on a scouting or hunting expedition. They were under the lead of +Amokeat, who rode away on the back of Whirlwind. They had been gone +several days and were liable to return at any hour, or they might be +absent for a week or more longer. + +When Deerfoot gained this information he was filled with indignation. +Without speaking, he turned his back upon his friends and walked to and +fro for several minutes. He was striving to gain control of his +emotions, and some time passed before he could do so. When he succeeded +he rejoined his comrades, several of the Nez Perces gathering round and +watching the four with no little curiosity. + +"Amokeat did not ask Deerfoot that he might ride Whirlwind," said the +Shawanoe, the flash not fully gone from his eyes, and a slight +tremulousness showing in his voice. + +"He had no business to do so," added the impulsive Victor; "I wonder +that the horse allowed anyone to ride him except you." + +George Shelton tried to soothe his troubled friend. + +"I understand how you feel, Deerfoot, but it looks to me as if it will +come out all right. The Nez Perces rode off on their horses, with +Whirlwind in the lead. Why should they not come back the same way, with +Whirlwind none the worse? Amokeat did not expect you for some time, and +who can wonder that he wished to ride such a steed?" + +Deerfoot turned and looked in the face of the lad. + +"Does my brother wish Deerfoot to sit down and fold his hands and wait +for days and weeks, all the time not knowing whether Whirlwind will +come back again or not? Does not my brother see that there is not a day +nor an hour to be wasted? Deerfoot would die many times while waiting +for Amokeat; he cannot do it." + +This was another way of declaring that the young Shawanoe meant to set +out to recover his steed without an hour's unnecessary delay. All felt +in the circumstances that it was the best thing to do. No one offered +further suggestion. Mul-tal-la, who had spoken hardly a word, now told +Deerfoot he would find out all that was to be learned of Amokeat and +his party. + +Left alone with the lads, the Shawanoe explained the plan he had +formed. + +"Mul-tal-la will take my brothers to his home among the Blackfeet, +where they will stay until spring comes; winter is too near for them to +travel any farther toward the Ohio. Mul-tal-la will make them welcome +and they will not want for food and comforts." + +"And what of _you_?" + +"When Deerfoot meets Whirlwind, the two will join his brothers and all +will be together till the sun begins to melt the snow on the sides of +the mountains. Then they will set out for the Ohio which they left so +many months ago." + +"Will you make this search for Whirlwind on horseback or on foot?" + +"On foot; there is no horse that can help me. Whirlwind would be +offended if he saw me come after him on any other of these animals. +Deerfoot can travel better on foot than any other way." + +"You wish us to take our horses with us to the Blackfoot country?" + +The Shawanoe nodded. + +"Take the four and keep them among the Blackfeet; they will be needed +by us when spring comes." + +"You have plenty of bullets and powder. Is there anything of ours that +you would like?" asked Victor. + +"Yes,--_that_; it may be of help to Deerfoot." + +The dusky youth pointed to the spyglass suspended by a cord around the +neck of George Shelton. The owner instantly slipped the string over his +head. + +"You are welcome to it and to anything else of ours." + +"Deerfoot thanks his brothers, but there is nothing more he wishes. He +has his rifle, his powder horn, his bullet pouch, his flint and steel +and his hunting knife. Anything more would be a burden, but his heart +is warm with gratitude to his brothers." + +At this point in the conversation, Mul-tal-la returned with news of +what he had learned by his inquiries among the Nez Perces. + +The knowledge amounted to little. Chief Amokeat had led his warriors +northward three days before, starting just as the sun appeared. He gave +no word as to when he would come back, and none could do anything more +than guess, nor was the leader clear as to the nature of the business +on which he ventured. Perhaps he himself did not know. + +Still the task that Deerfoot had set himself seemed possible of +accomplishment. Knowing the point at which the party left the village +and the course taken by them, he could strike the trail, and to keep to +it would not be more difficult than many feats he had performed amid +the forests and canebrakes of Kentucky and Ohio. He made sure that +there was no mistake at the beginning. Then he bade his friends +good-bye. + +Before doing so he talked for some minutes with Mul-tal-la. The +Blackfoot favored the course Deerfoot had laid out for himself, though +it was not unlikely that the fact that opposition was useless may have +had its weight in the conclusion reached by Mul-tal-la. He told the +Shawanoe that he would proceed straight to the Blackfoot country, and +there await the coming of his friend, who expected like the boys to +spend the winter in that northern region. + +Deerfoot disliked "scenes" as much as did George and Victor Shelton. +The only ceremony between him and the three was the shaking of hands +and the expression of good wishes. Thus they parted. The dusky youth +made his way directly to the point where he had been informed Amokeat +and his party had left on their northward excursion, and, without +looking behind him, found the trail and began his long journey. + +Mul-tal-la waited for some minutes after his departure and then gave +the word for the brothers to make ready. Accordingly, the horses were +brought to the village, the saddles and bridles taken from the lodge of +the chieftain, where they had been stored, together with the +superfluous articles left behind when the explorers started on their +canoe voyage down the Columbia. To this property was added that which +had gone on the voyage. Everything was carefully packed on the back of +Zigzag, saddles and bridles were put in place, all three mounted, waved +good-bye and thanks to the Nez Perces, most of those that remained +behind having gathered to see the visitors off. Then these in turn +began the journey which was to take them through a pass in the Rocky +Mountains and into the extensive Blackfoot country. For a time we will +leave them to themselves and give our attention to Deerfoot, who was +never more resolute of purpose than when he determined not to rejoin +his friends until he had recovered Whirlwind, or at least gained +tidings of him. + +It may be said that the young Shawanoe was hopeful of finding the +stallion unharmed, and he had reasonable ground for such hope. He could +not help feeling displeased with the action of Amokeat, who certainly +had presumed in thus using the property of another. Still, if no harm +had befallen the steed, the Shawanoe would check the reproof he had in +mind. + +Several facts caused Deerfoot uneasiness. The beauty and nobleness of +the stallion could not fail to excite envy wherever and by whomever +seen. His owner believed that Amokeat would steal him if he had the +chance, but it need not be explained that the circumstances rendered +that impossible. In venturing upon this raid, the Nez Perces were sure +to come in collision with hostile Indians. They had lost warriors and +horses before. Indeed, their enemies had invaded the homes of the Nez +Perces and robbed them. Suppose Amokeat and his companions got into a +fight with some of the northern tribes. As likely as not the Nez Perces +would be defeated. In that case, Whirlwind would be first of the spoils +gathered in by the victors. + +Suppose again the Nez Perces were victorious. The possession of the +matchless stallion must be betrayed to their enemies, who would leave +no stone unturned to capture him. There was every reason, too, to fear +that the hostiles would be successful; for they would be in their own +country and have every advantage on their side. With all the charity +that Deerfoot could feel, he could not help condemning the Nez Perce +chieftain for taking the great risk of causing the loss of Whirlwind. + +You need hardly be reminded that if Deerfoot found this had taken +place, he had no thought of giving up the hunt. If it was conceivable +that the steed had fallen into the hands of the Eskimos, and they had +journeyed to the Arctic circle with him, the Shawanoe would have kept +straight on until he overtook the despoilers. + +The Shawanoe gave a fine exhibition of his consummate skill in tracking +a party of horsemen. When this party numbered a score, more or less, it +was no trouble to keep to the trail, which was plainly marked; but had +he done this his progress would have been delayed, for he would have +had to follow every turning and doubling, which would have made the +journey twice as lengthy as a straight line. + +When Deerfoot was hardly a mile from the Nez Perce village he followed +the footprints to the top of a ridge, where he paused and scanned the +broad, mountainous country spread out before him. He knew the Nez +Perces must have reached this point shortly after sunrise. He noted the +general direction of the trail as it descended the slope in front, and +accepted that as the course which the horsemen intended to follow. Then +he fixed upon the point where they would be likely to make their midday +halt. It was a clump of trees and undergrowth on the shores of a small +lake, whose waters gleamed in the sun. Paying no further attention to +the trail itself, Deerfoot set out at a swift lope for the body of +water. + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +THE TRAIL NORTHWARD. + + +The small lake which was the destination of Deerfoot seemed to be only +two or three miles distant, but he knew it was all of twenty miles +away. Being on foot, he took the most direct course. The route of the +horses was of necessity so tortuous and difficult that it must have +been fully a half greater than the direct one. The task was so easy for +the Shawanoe that he did not lope or run, but kept up his swinging +gait, which caused him not the least fatigue. Now and then he was +forced to make a circuit around a mass of rocks, or a densely wooded +section, but these diversions were of little account. They might have +been twice as extensive and still he would not have minded them. + +When near the body of water he climbed another ridge, upon whose crest +the growth of wood was slight, and took a sweeping survey of the +surrounding country. The scenery was magnificent and impressive. Far to +the northward rose a towering range of mountains, whose snowy peaks +pierced the sky and suggested enormous white clouds piled against the +horizon. To the west rose another range, one of whose summits was +loftier than any within his range of vision. Seen in the far distance, +the soft air gave it a slight bluish tint, which gradually dissolved +into fleecy whiteness toward the crest. To the eastward the landscape +was made up of ridges, elevations and valleys, with growths of pine, +cedar, oak and other species of wood. The lake's outlet was toward the +west, winding in and out among the depressions until a curve hid it +from sight fully a score of miles away. + +There was a biting sharpness in the air that told of the nearness of +winter, for the month of November was come, and in that northern +latitude the rigorous season would soon set in. A whiff of air which +fanned the face of the Indian brought the chill of snow and ice in it, +while here and there the leaves of some of the deciduous trees drifted +downward like the soft falling flakes of snow. + +Deerfoot raised the glass to his eyes and slowly swept the field of +vision. It was a striking proof of the solitude of this immense region +that he did not see the first sign of a human being. No horsemen riding +across the open spaces or climbing the wooded heights formed a part of +the picture, nor in any direction could he detect the faint smoke of a +camp fire. Wherever the Nez Perces whom he was pursuing might be, they +were still a long distance away. + +But the diversified landscape did not lack animal life. The most +interesting sight was that of two grizzly bears, that were frolicking +like a couple of puppies in an open space at the foot of a slight +elevation. Deerfoot held the glass pointed at them for some minutes and +more than once smiled at the odd picture. The great hulking brutes +tumbled, rolled, pawed and boxed each other, all the while pretending +to bite and yet taking care that neither tooth nor nail did harm. Then +one would start to run off, as if frightened, with the other in hot +pursuit. When overtaken, and sometimes before, the fugitive would wheel +and cuff and bite at the other, as if in a dreadful rage. You know how +amusing the antics of kittens and puppies are. Imagine, if you can, two +enormous bears disporting themselves in the same comical fashion, and +you will understand why the Shawanoe watched the couple minute after +minute, forgetting for the time the serious business on which he was +engaged. + +But this was not all that attracted him in his surroundings. From out +the undergrowth on the northern side of the stream forming the outlet +of the lake came two or three hundred buffaloes, their dusky bodies +imparting a strange appearance of agitation to that portion of the +landscape. They headed for the stream, which was no more than a hundred +feet in width, and plunged in, pausing long enough to drink, flirting +their tails and tossing their heads, bellowing and crowding one +another. The water was too shallow to force them to swim, but it was +splashed and flung in all directions. When those at the front emerged +they broke into a gallop, with the others dashing tumultuously after +them. + +Their course brought them within a few rods of the base of the +elevation on which Deerfoot was standing. He walked down the slope +until quite near the head of the herd, when he brought his rifle to his +shoulder and sent a bullet just back of the foreleg of one of the +bulls. The stricken beast made a single plunging dive and then rolled +over dead. Being on the fringe of the herd he was not trampled upon, +and none of his companions paid any attention to him. The bison is--or +rather _was_--a stupid creature, his own destruction often resulting +from his lack of ordinary intelligence. + +Deerfoot waited until the last animal had passed, when he went forward +to where the carcass of the game lay and deftly extracted its tongue. +He did not touch any other portion, but, washing the delicacy in the +stream, carried it to the small grove of trees which he had fixed upon +in his mind as the place of the encampment of the Nez Perces, on their +first day after leaving their village. + +Before he reached the shelter of the clump of trees the quick eye of +the Shawanoe saw the imprints of hoofs, and signs of a party of +horsemen having halted at the spot. Chief Amokeat and his Nez Perces +had made their first meal on fish drawn from the lake, as was shown by +the fragments of their feast scattered round. Considerable ashes +indicated the spot where a fire had been kindled, in the usual +primitive manner of spinning a light pointed stick, whose sharpened end +was thrust into another dry branch. + +Thus Deerfoot's calculations proved to be right. He had reached the +scene of the midday halt of the Nez Perces by traveling about +two-thirds of the distance of his predecessors. With his flint and +steel he soon had a blaze going. Over it he broiled the bison tongue, +cut into thin strips, and ate his fill. The meal was a big one for him, +and he would not go out of his way to procure any more food for +twenty-four hours or more. Taking a long draught from the cold, +crystalline waters, he resumed his journey, which was due north, his +blanket fastened about his shoulders, and his rifle sometimes resting +in the crook made by bending his left arm at the elbow, after the style +of modern sportsmen, held sometimes in a trailing position, and again +reposing upon his shoulder. + +For two miles or more he kept to the trail, inasmuch as it was direct +and nothing was to be gained by leaving it. With his senses alert, he +finally turned to the right, in order to take advantage of a mass of +rocks on ground so elevated that a more extensive view than the former +one could be secured. He climbed as nimbly as a monkey to the top, +glanced over the many square miles spread out before his gaze and then +looked northward. + +Ah! he saw something suggestive. The glass was pointed toward the spot +and instantly confirmed the unaided eye. In the horizon, in the mist of +a stretch of wooded country, he observed a faint, almost invisible line +of vapor climbing upward into the cold blue sky, and gradually +dissolving, until at the height of a hundred feet or less all trace of +it vanished. + +The most careful scrutiny could not tell anything more. The spot was +between fifteen and twenty miles away, with the roughest sort of +country intervening. It was a good day's journey distant, but in the +same moment that Deerfoot made his interesting discovery he resolved to +thread his way to the place without a minute's halt on his part until +he reached his destination. + +His quick mind instantly saw several explanations of the "sign." It +could not be the Nez Perces riding north, for it was impossible that +they had lagged to such an extent on the road. If it was Amokeat and +his party, they must be returning from their raid, or hunting +expedition, or whatever had engaged their energies. It would seem more +likely that the Indians belonged to some other tribe. Be that as it +may, the only means of answering the question was by finding out for +himself, and that Deerfoot started to do with the grim, unshakable +resolution of his nature. + +With all his matchless swiftness and endurance, he would not have been +able to travel the distance until the night was well advanced; for, +though there were numerous places where he broke into his fleet lope, +and more than once rose to a higher pace, he was compelled to make +detours that greatly lengthened the distance and added to the labor. +Again, a moderate walk was the best he could do. + +About the middle of the afternoon he came upon the bank of a deep, +swift stream fully a hundred yards wide. No doubt he could have found a +ford had he taken the time to search for it, but the minutes were too +valuable to waste. With hardly a moment's hesitation he took three +steps over the flinty floor, and then found he had to swim. He had not +so much as loosened the blanket looped about his shoulders and which +threatened to interfere with the movements of his arms. He held his +rifle above his head, so as to prevent any water running into the +barrel, either at the muzzle or by percolation at the vent, and swam +with his other arm and his feet. For a portion of the way he "trod +water," apparently with the same ease that he walked upon solid earth. +So he overcame the powerful current and emerged almost directly +opposite the point where he had entered. You will remember that in +approaching the stream he left the trail some time before, but he knew +it was not far off, and doubtless would have led him to a ford. That he +would not dally long enough to hunt out the more convenient crossing +place was another illustration of Deerfoot's indifference to his own +comfort. What though his garments were dripping when he stepped upon +solid earth again, and the air was almost wintry in its chill, he cared +naught. The exercise threw his frame into a glow and the moisture +gradually left his clothing. + +A few miles farther and the Shawanoe solved one question over which he +had been speculating. In the distance he caught sight of a party of +horsemen approaching from the direction of the camp whose smoke he had +noticed hours before. They were no more than two or three miles +distant, and when first seen were coming almost in a direct line for +Deerfoot. + +The first sight was that of a single horseman, who had ridden up the +farther side of a slope, and came into view as he neared the top. +Without pausing, he began the descent, and was followed by others, all +in single file, until seventeen rode into the field of vision. Before +Deerfoot brought his glass into use he had recognized the horsemen as +Nez Perces. They were returning from their expedition, and if the +statement of the number that had left home was correct, had lost at +least three. + +The spyglass disclosed the chieftain Amokeat to the Shawanoe, who, with +his horse on a walk, was riding at the head of the procession. The +instrument revealed another significant fact: + +Neither Amokeat nor any of his warriors was mounted on Whirlwind. + +Deerfoot had to struggle to restrain his indignation. Had he been +within reach of Amokeat at that moment, it is not unlikely he would +have dragged him from his horse and given him a lesson he could never +forget. The very thing the Shawanoe had feared from the first had +occurred: the stallion was either stolen or dead. + +But as Deerfoot advanced to meet the party, who soon observed and +identified him, he pulled himself together. It would have taken one who +knew him intimately, like Simon Kenton, or George or Victor Shelton, to +read in the slightly pale face and peculiar gleam of the dark eyes the +evidence of the emotion that the Shawanoe held well under control. + +It was in the depth of a broad valley, where there was a semblance to a +trail which had been made by bison or other animals on their way to +water, that Chief Amokeat drew up and awaited the approach of the +Shawanoe. The latter, as was his custom, made a half-military salute, +and, without any more preliminaries came to the point. He used the +Blackfoot tongue, which was familiar to the Nez Perce. + +"Deerfoot seeks his horse. Where is he?" + +Amokeat must have expected the question, for he shook his head and +answered in the language of the Blackfeet: + +"Amokeat is grieved to tell Deerfoot he will never see the horse he +loves again. It saddens the heart of Amokeat, but he speaks with a +single tongue." + +"Is my horse dead?" + +"That Amokeat does not know. Yesterday the Assiniboines took him from +us, and they are now far on their way to their villages." + +"Why did Amokeat take my horse from where Deerfoot had left him? Why +did he not wait until he could see Deerfoot and ask him. He has stolen +my horse." + +This was a pointed charge, but Deerfoot could not wholly curb his +anger. The chief, however, did not seem to feel the sting of the words, +though more than one of his warriors, who had drawn up their horses and +were looking on and listening, showed resentment. + +Amokeat now proceeded to tell in his own way what had befallen him and +his companions. He said they had started out for a hunt, though +expecting to have an encounter with some of their enemies before their +return. At a point about a hundred miles to the northeast, while riding +through a canyon, they were suddenly attacked by fully a hundred red +men, whom they recognized as Assiniboines that were a long way from +their hunting grounds. + +While it is more than likely the Nez Perce leader exaggerated the +number of his assailants, no doubt they were superior to the smaller +company. The latter put up a brave fight, but before they could +extricate themselves from the trap five of their number were shot from +their horses. This statement showed that originally the Nez Perces +numbered more than a score. + +Amokeat was on the back of Whirlwind, who carried him off with such +amazing speed that he was soon separated from his warriors. Deerfoot's +lips curled when he heard this statement, for to him it was a proof of +the cowardice of the chief. The party had no time to recover the bodies +of their fallen comrades, who were left to be scalped and despoiled by +the victors, the stray horses also passing into the hands of the +Assiniboines. + +Amokeat was in full flight when, in dashing through a mass of +undergrowth, he suddenly came face to face with eight or ten +Assiniboines (probably the number was less). He was ambushed so +cleverly that escape was out of the question. He would have resisted, +however, had not one of his enemies called out that he wished to have a +parley with him. + +This warrior, who was the leader of the little party, told Amokeat that +if he would swap the black stallion he rode for the pony of the +Assiniboines, the chief would not be harmed, but would be left free to +go to his own home. Had the grinning Nez Perce put his conclusion in +English, it would have been something like this: + +"I counted myself most fortunate, for what was to prevent the +Assiniboines from shooting me from the back of the stallion and then +taking him away with them? So the trade was made and he is now in the +hands of the Assiniboines." + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +THE LAND OF THE ASSINIBOINES. + + +As Deerfoot listened to the story of the Nez Perce leader his gorge +steadily rose, for the account was worse, if possible, than he had +expected to hear. Not only did he resent the cool appropriation of his +steed by Amokeat, but he read the proof of the cowardice of the chief, +who had deserted his companions when in peril and then, instead of +making a brave defence when cornered by the Assiniboines, had eagerly +passed over to them the property of another in order to secure his own +safety. + +The Shawanoe could not trust himself any further in the presence of +Amokeat, who sat on the back of his pony and looked serenely down in +his face, exulting over his own escape from the revenge of an enemy. + +"Amokeat is a dog!" exclaimed Deerfoot, compressing his lips, turning +around and walking from the presence of the chief and his party. He was +on the alert, for he half expected an attack from more than one of +them. If they had such action in mind, it was changed by the command of +the leader, who called to them to follow him as he resumed the journey +toward his own village. + +The Shawanoe had learned several important facts. Whirlwind had passed +from the hands of the Nez Perces to those of a wandering band of +Assiniboines, whose villages and hunting grounds lay well to the +northeast, some below and some above the boundary line in the country +of the Saskatchewan. Thither the Shawanoe would go, though knowing +absolutely nothing of the region or the people. In his contemptuous +scorn of Amokeat, Deerfoot did not so much as look behind him until the +afternoon was nearly gone and night was closing in. Then, when he +turned his gaze to the rear, he saw nothing of men or horses. + +He was thinking hard. It was evident that the only course which +promised hope was for him to keep to the trail left by the Nez Perces +until he reached the scene of the fight. From that point he would be +guided by the footprints of the Assiniboine animals. Of course there +was no distinguishable difference between those of Whirlwind and the +impressions made by any other of his species, but there ought to be +little difficulty in keeping to the main trail until he ran the party +down. + +You will understand that a number of puzzling complications threatened. +It might be that the Assiniboines would continue their hunting or +raiding excursions for days, turning off and pushing to the south or +east or west, with a view of attacking some of the tribes within United +States territory. The Shawanoe hoped that such would be the course of +the raiders, for it would simplify the situation. He would have a small +party to operate against, instead of a whole village or tribe. + +A singular difficulty presented itself. Deerfoot relied upon entering +the Assiniboine settlements or joining the raiders without rousing any +suspicion of his real errand. Then he would content himself in patience +and await a chance of slipping off with Whirlwind. The likelihood of +gaining such opportunity would be almost destroyed if his errand became +known. Now, the danger of betrayal was in the stallion himself. He +could not be made to understand the need of cunning and silence, but +was sure to show his joy at sight of his owner. When this was observed +by his captors, they would be certain to connect it with the long +journey of the stranger, who would then have all he could do to guard +his own life. + +Reflecting over this probable phase of the situation, Deerfoot decided +what his own conduct should be. He resolved that if Whirlwind made a +rush for him, thereby revealing the truth, he would leap upon his back, +throw himself forward, and send the steed flying off at the highest +speed. There would be imminent risk of both being shot before they +could pass beyond range, but the danger would be no greater than the +Shawanoe had faced many times, and still he did not bear a scar upon +his body. + +His plan, however, was to rely upon subtlety. If he could succeed in +locating his pet, he would keep out of the animal's sight until the +crisis came. He knew Whirlwind was alive, and was not very far off. +Less than two days previous he had passed over the same spot, and the +trail left by him and his companions could be readily followed. + +So it was that the young Shawanoe pressed forward with long, swift +strides until the gloom shut out all sight of the footprints. He could +calculate quite closely from the different landmarks the course +followed by the Nez Perces, but he determined to run no chances. Time +was too precious, and he was resolved not to go astray. + +He was in a wild, mountainous country, interspersed with ridges, +isolated peaks and lofty ranges. There were numerous valleys, canons, +gorges and ravines, with stretches of wood and stunted undergrowth. The +sound of falling waters, cascades and rapids was hardly ever absent. +Naturally the horsemen had sought the most favorable route, keeping +mainly to the valleys, but occasionally riding over elevated portions. +Thus the course was easier for Deerfoot than it would have been had the +party been on foot like himself. The Assiniboines were not likely to +make haste, for they had no reason for doing so. With his long strides, +his lope and occasional running, as the ground offered the chance, the +pursuer knew he was gaining upon those whom he was so anxious to +overtake. + +When night had fairly come, Deerfoot sought out a place among the rocks +in which to sleep. He did not look for food, nor did he so much as +drink from the mountain stream that he heard rippling near at hand. It +took some time to find a suitable spot for a bed. He fixed upon a +cavity large enough for him to stretch out with his blanket wrapped +about him. He could have readily kindled a fire, but preferred not to +do so, since it was liable to draw the attention of wild animals, or +possibly of those of his own race who might be in the vicinity. As it +was, a prowling wolf or bear might threaten, but the youth felt no +misgiving when, after spending a brief time in prayer, he lay down and +speedily sank into slumber. + +At the first streakings of light he was on his feet. Praying again, he +fastened his blanket about his shoulders, knelt at the mountain stream, +drank deeply, bathed face and hands and was off once more. No move was +made toward procuring the morning meal, which most folks in his +situation would have found indispensable. + +The trail was clearly marked, but before resuming his pursuit Deerfoot +climbed to the highest elevation near at hand and spent a few minutes +in studying the surrounding country. The main features were similar to +those already described, except perhaps in the increase of the +ruggedness of the scenery. He was within the Rocky Mountain district, +but kept mainly to the foothills, where journeying was easier than +among the mountains themselves. + +Noting that the general course of the trail he was following up was +from the northeast, he scanned with special interest the country in +that direction. He picked out a point some twenty miles distant as the +place where the Nez Perces were most likely to have made one of their +camps. While he might have shortened the time by keeping a direct line +to it, he stuck to his resolution not to turn aside from the trail. + +Though he did not catch sight of any horseman, he saw that which roused +his curiosity. Hardly a mile away he observed a single Indian coming +toward him on foot. It may be said the stranger leaped into view, for +Deerfoot was looking over a certain spot at the country beyond when a +peculiar, flitting movement caused him to depress his glass to learn +the cause. + +The Indian seemed to have been following a roughly marked path, when he +came to a huge boulder, which, instead of passing around, he climbed, +walked across the top, and then dropped to the ground again. It was +this action which caused Deerfoot to turn his gaze upon him. + +Under the glass the stranger was seen with as much distinctness as if +he were only a few rods distant. When looking at him the Shawanoe, for +the first time in his life, saw a dwarf belonging to his own race. The +man had broad shoulders and body and sturdy legs, but his height could +not have been more than four and a half feet. Moreover he was very +bow-legged, was a hunchback, had a broad mouth, a flat nose and small +twinkling eyes. His long black hair dangled loosely about his +shoulders, he was clad in a hunting dress similar to that worn by the +Shawanoe, except that he was without a blanket, and his clothing was +much shabbier. He carried a bow fully double his own length, and +advanced with a curious sidelong, wabbling gait, which accented more +strikingly his difference from those of his own people. + +When the astonished Deerfoot had noted these peculiarities, he scanned +the vicinity of the dwarf for his companions. None was seen, and our +friend decided that the fellow was entirely alone. It was impossible to +make a guess as to the tribe to which he belonged, though Deerfoot +suspected, without any particular reason, that he was an Assiniboine. +As to how he came to be by himself, and traveling southward, no theory +could be formed by the astute Shawanoe. + +The latter lowered his glass, and, standing in full view, watched the +hunchback as he drew near with his crab-like, wabbling gait. Although +the Shawanoe was a much more conspicuous object on the landscape, it +was evident the other did not discover him until he was almost within a +hundred yards. No better proof could have been asked that the stranger +was afflicted with poor eyesight. + +Suddenly he descried the form on the rocks and stopped short. He was +startled. Then he began hurriedly drawing an arrow from the bundle hung +behind his shoulder. It was a curious coincidence, which caught +Deerfoot's notice, that the dwarf was left-handed like himself. The +latter laid his gun at his feet and raised both hands above his head, a +sign of friendship. The stranger paused in his warlike preparations, +but seemed in doubt whether to launch a missile or to accept the sign +of comity. Deerfoot picked up his weapon, held his other hand over his +head, and began carefully descending the elevation. He kept a close +watch on the other, for he half expected he would let fly with his +arrow, and it would have been unpleasant, to say the least, to act as a +target, even at a considerable distance. The dwarf stood motionless, +closely watching the Shawanoe as he came toward him, evidently doubting +and hesitating, but Deerfoot kept up his signs of goodwill, which the +other could not fail to understand. + +It is not unreasonable to believe that the personality of Deerfoot had +much to do with removing the misgivings of the stranger, for the +smiling face of the Shawanoe as he drew near would have impressed +anyone, though Deerfoot himself would never have admitted anything of +the kind. Be that as it may, the meeting was friendly, though Deerfoot +did not offer his hand in greeting, for he thought it unlikely that the +other would have understood the meaning of the salutation. + +He addressed the stranger in the Blackfoot tongue, only to receive a +shake of the head in reply. The dwarf did not understand a syllable. In +response, he used a language that was "all Greek" to the Shawanoe. +There was no common ground, except that of signs, upon which the two +could meet, and that was of slight service. + +"Assiniboine? Assiniboine?" asked Deerfoot, with a marked rising +inflection. Another shake of the head might indicate a denial of such +tribal relation, or what was more likely, a failure to comprehend the +question. Deerfoot repeated the word "Nez Perce," and was replied to as +before. + +The first bit of information that the Shawanoe could gather for a time +was that the Indian of abbreviated stature came from the north. That +was clearly established, as was the direction which he was following, +but nothing was brought to light as to the nature of his errand in the +south. + +The thought had been in the mind of our friend from the first that this +misshapen red man had seen the party of Assiniboines who held +Whirlwind. How was the question to be asked? + +Deerfoot stepped to a tree resembling the water maple that grew a few +feet to the right of them. Its diameter was a foot or more. With his +hunting knife he cut out a square some six inches in diameter and +carefully peeled it off, the other attentively watching him all the +time. + +Deerfoot now proceeded to trace on the filmy inner side of the bark +with the point of his knife the outlines of a horse with unusually long +tail and mane. This done, he depicted a warrior sitting on him with no +saddle except a blanket and without bridle. When the crude but +symmetrical picture was finished, he handed the piece of bark to the +other. The dwarf studied it a minute or two with close interest, +Deerfoot meanwhile watching his countenance. + +Suddenly the homely visage lit up. The stranger recognized the figure +of the beautiful stallion. He had seen him! + +With a thrill of hope the Shawanoe pointed north, his gesture clearly +meaning that he wished to know whether it was there the animal had been +met. The stranger shook his head. Deerfoot was disappointed, fearing +his meaning had not been understood. It seemed to him that the +Assiniboine horsemen must be journeying in that direction, and the +negative motion of the other's head might indicate that he did not +catch the drift of the question. + +Deerfoot now pointed toward the rising sun, only to be answered by +another shake of his head. He next indicated the northeast. The dwarf +nodded vigorously several times. Then he gazed steadily into the +handsome face and began circling one of his hands rapidly around his +head, pointing to his moccasins and then to the sky. These peculiar +gestures were repeated a number of times, when they ceased as abruptly +as they began. + +The Shawanoe could not form the first idea of what the man was trying +to say, nor did he ever learn. + +The dwarf perceived that he could not make himself understood, gave up +the effort, and with an awkward good-bye resumed his tramp southward. +Uncertain of what whim might suddenly take possession of him, Deerfoot, +while also moving in the opposite direction, kept a furtive watch to +the rear. He did not see the dwarf look behind him and it is not +probable that he meditated any wrong. + +The Shawanoe was not satisfied with what had occurred. Glancing down at +the trail and as far ahead as it could be traced, he saw that its +course was due north. He believed that it led for a long way toward +that point of the compass. If such proved the fact the hunchback had +tried to deceive the inquirer by making him believe that Whirlwind was +to be sought to the northeast. The Shawanoe could no longer doubt that +the nature of his inquiry had been understood, and the reply of the +dwarf was clear. Deerfoot was inclined to believe the strange creature +really belonged to the Assiniboine tribe and was trying to shield his +countrymen. + +Moreover, the Shawanoe knew little of this people. He understood in a +vague way that their homes were well to the northward, and partly in +another country than the United States. The true direction, however, +was to the northeast. Thus the Indian of abbreviated stature had +indicated the right course after all. + +Adhering to his policy, Deerfoot wasted no time. While these thoughts +were passing through his mind, he was loping forward with the trail +still as his guide, and had not gone two miles when he came upon the +scene of the fight between the Assiniboines and the Nez Perces. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +A WELCOME SIGHT. + + +The first sign that caught the eye of the Shawanoe was the mute forms +of the five Nez Perces, stretched here and there over a space of an +eighth of a mile. All had been scalped and mutilated. But he had seen +such shocking sights before, and he did not go near the bodies nor give +them further attention. It was no great task for him to transfer his +interest from the trail of one party to that of another, and he was +speedily loping forward as rapidly as before. + +To his astonishment he had gone only a little way when he discovered a +marked change of course. The Assiniboine footprints pointed to the +northeast. The information gained from the dwarf was reliable; the +horsemen were heading for their own villages. + +The Shawanoe called all his consummate woodcraft into play to determine +how much time had passed since the party rode over this ground. He +figured that it must have been on the previous day, though such +conclusion did not fully accord with what was told him by the chieftain +Amokeat. His opinion of that leader, however, made him ready to believe +anything ill of him. + +If the horsemen had twenty-four hours the start of their pursuer, and +kept up their rapid flight, he could hardly expect to come up with them +for several days. Deerfoot believed he could steadily gain, but he was +on foot and they were mounted. Such gain, in the most favorable +circumstances, must be gradual. Had they halted for any length of time, +or diverged from the regular course, the prospect would be all the more +favorable for him. + +With this theory, Deerfoot now made a change of policy. Instead of +keeping to the trail with all its windings (made in order to +accommodate the horses), he adopted his other recourse--that of +reasoning out the route most likely to be followed by the warriors, +and, fixing upon a camp far in advance, making his way thither by the +most direct course. Provided he fell into no error, he would thus save +miles of distance and hours of time. + +It was still early in the day when he forded a narrow, rapid stream, in +which the water rose to his waist, and climbing the nearest elevation, +which was a ridge crowned with rocks and a few stunted cedars, he +paused to make a study of the country spread before him. + +Naturally his first scrutiny was directed to the northeast. In that +direction the surface was rolling, with numerous valleys and mountain +spurs, but none of the latter was of great height. The towering peaks +rose more to the north and west. There was variety and yet sameness in +the vast undulating expanse, with its wealth of wood, of rocks, some +bleak and dark of color, and others fringed with vegetation, of +swelling hills, many of which elsewhere would have been called +mountains, and beautiful valleys, with numerous streams hidden through +most of their flow, all seeking an outlet in the Atlantic or Pacific, +hundreds of miles away. + +The bed of one mountain torrent could be traced for a long distance by +the mist that hovered over it, though the spectator could not catch the +first sight of the water itself. At another point to the right the +Shawanoe saw what appeared to be a curved streak of silver, fifty feet +in height and but two or three feet wide. It looked to be absolutely +motionless, and yet it was a waterfall, from whose foamy base little +clouds of steam floated upward or were wafted aside by the wisps of +wind. + +Deerfoot refrained from using the instrument until he had done all he +could with his unaided vision. His reason for this was his wish to +place himself in the same situation as the Assiniboine party. None of +them knew what a spyglass is, and he tried to reason from what he saw +upon what point they would be likely to fix as their halting place. + +Had he known the precise minute or hour when the horsemen had ridden +past the spot near where he was standing, the problem would have been +easy of solution, but no Indian or white hunter ever lived who could +settle such a question without more definite data. We hear stories of +achievements of that nature, but most of them are mythical, though the +woodcraft of many a trailer has enabled him to do things which to +others were impossible. + +The Shawanoe believed the Assiniboines had ridden past at a moderate +pace about the middle of the preceding day. Acting on that supposition, +he selected a point somewhat more than a dozen miles to the northeast +as the one where they would have been likely to encamp for the night. +The trouble was that there was little in the wooded place, near a small +body of water, bearing a striking resemblance to the lake of the +previous day, to favor it above others in the neighborhood. They might +have halted several miles beyond or that much nearer the standpoint of +the Shawanoe. + +At the best it was guesswork; but having made his conjecture, Deerfoot +now raised the glass to his eyes and centered his attention upon the +spot. As he did so he was thrilled by a discovery which set his nerves +at once on edge. + +On the edge of the trees, near the lake itself, he saw two Indians, +standing as if in conversation. When he lowered the glass it was +impossible to make them out at so great distance, but the instrument +revealed them clearly. Suddenly one of the couple came forward to the +body of water, lay down on his face and drank. The other walked part of +the way and then stopped, and was rejoined by the former. It looked as +if they resumed their converse over some subject in which they were +unusually interested. + +Deerfoot was almost certain that the two were members of the party for +whom he was hunting. If such were the fact, something must have +occurred to cause them to linger on their return to their villages. + +While he was speculating as to whether this was probable, smoke began +filtrating through the tops of the pines, behind the couple. A fire had +been started, though the hour of day was one when the party naturally +would have been in motion. + +The question remained as to whether the horsemen intended to stay where +they were until the morrow or would soon resume their journey. The last +supposition seemed the most likely. + +The decision of the Shawanoe was to lessen the distance between him and +the horsemen while such a fine opportunity offered. Flinging the glass +over his shoulder he set out to overtake the party in advance, doing +his best to decide upon the right policy, now that the important +information had come to him. + +The most puzzling phase of the situation has been explained. But for +the certain recognition that Whirlwind would make of his master, the +latter would have gone direct to the Assiniboine camp and watched for +his opportunity; but as nearly as he could determine there must be +fully a score if not more of the warriors. To "cut out" the stallion +from among them when the sun was shining was clearly an impossibility, +though, as has been intimated, Deerfoot was ready to make the attempt +if no other chance offered. + +Discretion warned him to keep out of sight of the party until +nightfall. He could then reconnoiter the camp with good prospect of +getting Whirlwind away. If the Assiniboines placed a sentinel on duty, +Deerfoot was confident he could get the better of him in the darkness. +The raiders would not be looking for any attack, though when on the war +trail they were sure to adopt the usual precautions. + +The Shawanoe, therefore, had not gone far when he decided upon his plan +of action. He would stay out of sight of men and animals until the +gloom gave him his opportunity. Meanwhile it was well to decrease the +intervening distance so far as was prudent. + +It was yet early in the afternoon when the interval was cut in half. +While doing this he stopped and made frequent surveys of the lake and +wood. It would have made no great difference had he been observed by +the horsemen, for it was impossible for them to suspect his identity or +his business. Still, it was just as well to have his presence in the +neighborhood unknown and unsuspected. + +All this time the vapor was climbing through the tree tops. Those who +had kindled the fire were still there, for they could not leave by the +"back door" without being seen by the vigilant Shawanoe. He was +surprised that none showed himself during these hours. The couple who +had first caught his eye had disappeared long before in the wood and +remained out of sight. + +His interest led Deerfoot to continue edging forward until, by the +close of the afternoon, he was within a mile of the camp. He had +accomplished this by taking advantage of all the protection possible. +Since plenty offered, and the Assiniboines were not apprehending +anything of that nature, the task was not so hard as it might seem. + +The weather remained clear, though still keen and cold. The Shawanoe +had not eaten food for a long time, but he gave no thought to that. He +was ready to wait until the morrow before satisfying his hunger. His +one resolution was to regain Whirlwind, if such a feat was within the +range of human possibility. + +The young Shawanoe did not forget that he was acting upon a theory that +might prove a rope of sand. The camp which he was reconnoitering with +such care might be that of another party, even though they were +Assiniboines. The probabilities, however, justified him in believing he +was on the right track. + +A curious feature of the situation was that he had not as yet seen a +single horse. When a company of Indians stopped to rest, even for a +short time, they were accustomed to allow their animals to graze. +Between the margin of wood and the lake the dull green of grass was +plainly perceptible. Perhaps there was some open spot among the trees +which offered better pasturage for the horses. Deerfoot could not feel +clear in his own mind as to the explanation of the absence of all sight +of the animals. + +He was speculating as to the cause of this singular fact when six +horses issued from among the timber and came frolicking and cavorting +down to the water's margin, where they thrust their noses into the lake +to drink. No Indians showed themselves, the training of the animals +making it unnecessary to guard them. + +One of the steeds emerged from a point several yards to the right of +the others and kept apart from them, as if he felt too proud to +associate with those of common blood. When he lowered his head he was +fully a couple of rods from his companions. This horse was the stallion +Whirlwind. + +[Illustration: "This Horse was Whirlwind."] + +The sight of his peerless creature threw the Shawanoe into a flutter, +and it required all his self-control to restrain himself from running +forward and calling to Whirlwind to meet him, but he resolutely held +his ground, sheltered behind the projection of the boulder he had used +as a screen in keeping the camp under surveillance. The situation was +so critical that Deerfoot perhaps was over-cautious. + +He reasoned keenly. A mile separated steed and master. The latter could +have no thought that the youth from whom he had been separated for +weeks was near. If Deerfoot emitted his piercing whistle the call would +not be recognized on the instant, and the animal would be confused. The +dress of Deerfoot and his appearance were so similar to those of other +Indians that Whirlwind would not be likely to identify him until they +came considerably nearer each other. The Assiniboines were in camp. +They, too, would hear the signal and be quick to discover what it +meant. Rather than have the black stallion escape from their possession +they would shoot him as he ran. A red man always prefers to slay a +captive rather than surrender him. With the horse shot Deerfoot would +be forced to have it out with the warriors at such disadvantage that +only one result could follow, for the Assiniboines were not only armed +with guns--at least several were thus equipped--but they were daring +and resolute. + +It was these fears which caused the young Shawanoe to decide to remain +in hiding until nightfall, which was now at hand. It is quite probable +that the plan of calling Whirlwind to him would have succeeded, as the +youth afterward admitted; but it certainly would have been attended +with risk of failure, and he never regretted the decision he made +within the same minute that he caught sight of his equine friend. + +Like the king that he was, the stallion, having drank his fill, wheeled +and with dignified step passed back among the trees, keeping apart from +the others, who would have felt (as had Zigzag felt) the impact of the +fiercely driven heels had they ventured upon any familiarity. + +So it came about that Deerfoot the Shawanoe stayed in concealment until +the gathering gloom shut out the grove and its occupants. There was no +moon, but the star-gleam was strong and gave him all the light he +wished. He preferred that to stronger illumination. + +During the slow passing minutes that the youth waited he reached the +conclusion that the Assiniboines in the timber were only a part of the +horsemen that had overthrown the Nez Perces. Some cause had led them to +divide, and a half dozen or so were waiting for the others to rejoin +them. Why this separation had taken place Deerfoot could not +understand, nor did he allow himself to be interested in the question. +The reason for his belief lay in the number of horses that had issued +from among the trees. In the circumstances, all the animals would have +gone for water at the same time. + +Deerfoot was cool, calm and perfectly poised when he stepped from +behind the boulder and began his stealthy approach to the Assiniboine +camp. He loosed his blanket from the fastening which held the fold +together in front and laid it over his right arm. He confidently +expected a fight and did not mean to have his limbs hampered. +Instinctively he slipped his hand down to his girdle. The knife was +there. He had examined his rifle long before. The charge and priming +were as they should be, and he grasped the weapon with his left hand. +He gave no thought to the fact that more than twenty-four hours had +passed since he had eaten food. He was accustomed to such abstinence +and the situation drove away all appetite. He would not have taken a +dozen paces to the right or left to pick up nourishment. + +A complication was threatened by the return of the other Assiniboines, +but aside from that Deerfoot did not mean to wait a half hour longer +than was necessary. His stealthy approach was continued until in the +gloom he made out the dim outlines of the timber. The western terminus +of the lake lay just to the left, so that in order to reach the camp he +had to diverge for some rods in that direction. But the way was clear +and the brief circuit brought him to the edge of the wood, with the +calm sheet of water stretching for a half mile to the east, which was +on his right hand. + +The first step was to locate the Indians and their horses, for the wise +general acquaints himself with the battle ground upon which the +momentous issue is to be decided. The twinkle of light that glimmered +among the trees guided the Shawanoe, and with little trouble he gained +a position from which, unsuspected by the Assiniboines, he had a +perfect view of them. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +COMRADES TRUE. + + +The picture upon which Deerfoot looked recalled many similar ones in +Ohio and Kentucky. There were six warriors seated on the ground, most +of the party in lolling postures, three smoking long-stemmed pipes, and +all had evidently partaken of food a short time before, for a faint +odor of broiling venison or bison meat was in the air, and the signs +within the camp showed that a meal had been prepared and eaten. + +The burning sticks were piled against the base of a tree more than two +feet in diameter and were burning so vigorously that the circle of +light reached well beyond the group and pierced the shadows among the +pines and cedars. A brief survey of the group left no doubt that they +were awaiting the arrival of friends, as they had been doing for hours +past, and might continue to do through the remaining night. + +There was no reason why the Shawanoe should lose any time in surveying +the Assiniboines, for he felt no interest in them. He was surprised to +note that every one had a rifle, none being armed with the primitive +bow and arrows. He tarried only long enough to decide in his mind who +was the leader, and therefore the new proprietor of Whirlwind. Deerfoot +had no special enmity against him, for it was Amokeat, the Nez Perce +chieftain, who was responsible for the loss of the stallion. + +The Shawanoe had straightened up and was silently withdrawing from his +advanced position, holding the sheltering tree between him and the camp +fire, when he was startled by a whinny from some point in the gloom +close at hand. Turning his head he caught the dim outlines of Whirlwind +making his way among the trees toward him. The sagacious stallion, +through that wonderfully acute sense of smell which his species often +show, had discovered the proximity of his master and had set out to +find him. The space between the two was so brief that Deerfoot had +hardly paused and looked behind him when the silken nose of Whirlwind +was thrust against his face, and after his old fashion he touched his +tongue to the cool cheek of his master and then affectionately rested +his head on his shoulder. + +It was a critical situation, for the steed had already warned the +Assiniboines that something unusual was going on, but the delight and +gratitude of the Shawanoe were so deep that he could not deny himself +the pleasure of caressing his steed. He touched his lips to his nose, +patted his forehead and neck and murmured: + +"Whirlwind! Deerfoot's heart is thankful! He is happy, for he has found +his best friend. No one shall part us again!" + +But in that joyful moment the delicate situation could not be +forgotten. Instead of leaping upon the back of the horse where the +trees and limbs would interfere with a rapid flight, in addition to +placing the rider at a disadvantage in case of attack, Deerfoot told +Whirlwind to pass out of the timber and wait for him. The horse +promptly obeyed, for he understood the whispered words. Then the youth +placed himself directly behind the horse, ready to fight off any and +all assailants, and followed the steed, thus forming his rear guard. + +Between Deerfoot and the camp fire loomed the form of an Assiniboine +warrior. His sensitive ear had heard the soft neigh, and even the low +voice of Deerfoot. He knew that a thief was in the grove--he must have +thought he was a Nez Perce--and was making off with Whirlwind, who was +held in higher esteem than all the other horses together. + +The Shawanoe saw that a fight was inevitable. He passed his rifle to +the right hand, over whose arm his blanket was resting, and drew his +hunting knife. Even in that crisis the chivalry of the Shawanoe would +not allow him to take full advantage of the situation. He could have +struck down his enemy without the least risk to himself. He chose +rather to give his antagonist warning. + +"Dog of an Assiniboine!" he muttered in the Blackfoot tongue. "The +Shawanoe fears you not!" + +The warrior leaped forward like a crouching tiger. He had caught sight +of the lithe form in the faint glow of the firelight, and he assailed +it with all the vicious vigor of his nature. The lightning-like blow of +his knife made a hissing sound as it cut the air and buried its point +in the blanket which Deerfoot thrust forward to receive it. Then the +Shawanoe delivered _his_ blow. Enough said. + +Brief as was the terrific encounter, it occurred too close to camp for +the other Assiniboines to remain in doubt for a moment. Moreover, when +the victim of the Shawanoe's prowess went down not to rise again he +uttered an ear-splitting screech which echoed through the grove. + +Deerfoot turned and ran among the trees after Whirlwind. From some +cause the stallion had changed his direction and was waiting on the +edge of the wood several rods from where his master emerged. The latter +glanced hastily around in the gloom without seeing him. He uttered a +low signal which the horse instantly obeyed, and with another neigh of +delight trotted to his master. + +Deerfoot was about to vault upon his back, but hesitated. The sounds +indicated that the whole five Assiniboines had rushed to the spot and +were already within arm's reach of master and stallion. They would be +so near when Whirlwind made his dash that they would fire a volley +which was certain to kill one or the other, and not unlikely both rider +and animal. + +Nor could anything be gained by turning at bay and fighting the whole +five, though the Shawanoe would not have hesitated to do that had no +other recourse been left to him. With that quick perception which +approached the marvelous in him he ordered Whirlwind to gallop along +the side of the timber and again wait for him. Then Deerfoot dived +among the trees as if in fear of the fierce warriors closing in upon +him. His aim was to draw the attention of the party from the stallion +to himself, and he succeeded. + +For three or four minutes he dodged in and out, where in the gloom he +could not escape more than one collision with the limbs. The whole +party plunged after him. They knew that the audacious stranger had +slain one of their number and were determined he should not escape +their vengeance, for with him disposed of the black stallion could be +recovered at leisure. + +All the time that Deerfoot was whisking here and there, leaping to the +right and left, and getting forward as fast as he could, he held his +knife grasped and ready to use on the instant the emergency arose. He +was so handicapped by the obstructions and the darkness that he could +do little more than hold his own. His enemies were too near for him to +hide himself from them. Had he attempted to do so the whole lot would +have descended upon him like an avalanche. + +There was no chance to select his route; all he could do was to drive +ahead and avoid being driven at bay. He took care not to pass near the +fire, where the glow would have betrayed him. He feared his foes would +shoot, though everything was so obscured that they were likely to wait +in the hope of capturing him or gaining a fairer aim. + +A faint lighting up in front showed that he was nearing the edge of the +wood. Two bounds carried him clear, and then, with the utmost speed of +which he was capable, he ran along the margin to a slight turn in the +conformation of the grove, when he leaped out into the open air and was +off with as great fleetness as he displayed on the home-stretch in his +race with Ralph Genther, after the turkey shoot at Woodvale. + +By his dodging and trickery he had gained an important start, but not +enough to put him beyond sight of the Assiniboines, who debouched from +the timber at the moment the form of the Shawanoe was fast dissolving +in the gloom. They were fleet of foot, and in the belief that they +could speedily run the fugitive to earth they made after him. Hardly +had the singular race opened when the astounded pursuers saw no +fugitive before them! He had been swallowed up in the darkness like an +arrow launched from a powerful bow. The Assiniboines must have come to +the belief that whoever the stranger was he knew how to run. You and I +came to that belief long ago. + +One of the chagrined pursuers fired in the direction of the flying +fugitive. The bullet probably passed within fifty feet of him, +certainly not near enough for Deerfoot to hear the whistle of the +missile. + +The Shawanoe was too wise to maintain his flight in a direct line, for +there was no saying how long his enemies would hunt for him. He made a +wide detour to the right and passed around the head of the lake, moving +as silently as a shadow and issuing no call to Whirlwind to join him. +Reaching the point he had in mind he stopped, peered around in the +gloom and carefully located himself. Then he placed his thumb and +forefinger between his teeth and pierced the stillness with that +peculiar whistle which could have been heard a mile away. + +Meanwhile, if we can believe that animals are capable of reasoning, +Whirlwind must have had some uncomfortable thoughts. He was listening +for the next orders of his master and could make nothing of the tumult +going on near him. He would have been eager to lend a helping hand, or, +rather, hoof, but did not know how to lend it. He might make matters +worse by the attempt. He had received his commands and it only remained +for him to obey them. + +While thus waiting, the Assiniboine leader--he who claimed him as his +particular property--assumed form in the starlight and drew near. +Whirlwind snuffed suspiciously. He could not understand matters, but he +had seen his master and comrade and resented any impertinence from +others. + +The Assiniboine hurried up and extended one hand to grasp the forelock +of the stallion, in order to lead him back to his place on the other +side of the camp. At that moment the signal of Deerfoot rang out. + +Perhaps the Assiniboine suspected the meaning of the call, for he +darted forward and seized the forelock. Whirlwind instantly reared, and +with a single blow of his hoof knocked the red man senseless. He did +not kill him, but it is safe to conclude that when the Assiniboine +regained his senses he knew a good deal more than he ever knew before. + +The waiting Shawanoe heard the sound of hoofs, and a minute later saw +the form of the stallion as he galloped up and paused with his nose +thrust forward, asking for another caress. + +He received it and in his mute way expressed his own pleasure at being +with his master again. The danger was not yet over, and the Shawanoe +deferred further petting until the opportunity was more fitting. +Resting one hand upon the neck of the stallion he leaped lightly +astride of him, still keeping the blanket about his own shoulders, for +the night was keen and the horse did not need the protection. + +Whirlwind yearned to stretch his limbs and speed away with his master +on his back. But it would have been unsafe. After leaving the vicinity +of the lake the country was rough, and in the darkness the +surest-footed horse was liable to fall. Moreover, there was no need of +haste. + +So the stallion passed out into the night at his usual graceful walk, +while his rider for the time listened and peered into the darkness +behind him for sound or sight of the Assiniboines who would have given +much for a chance to revenge themselves upon the daring youth that had +outwitted them. + +At the end of half an hour Deerfoot slipped from the back of his steed +and pressed his ear to the earth. If the Assiniboines were following +and were near he would learn the fact through this better conductor of +sound. He heard nothing and once more vaulted upon Whirlwind. + +Relieved for the time of all cause for fear, Deerfoot now gave grateful +attention to the proud stallion that was bearing him southward. He +first tested his recollection of the words of command which he had +taught him, and which you will remember were in a peculiar language +known only to the two. Whirlwind proved his excellent memory by +promptly responding to every order addressed to him. Then the Shawanoe +guided him by pressure of his knees, and by a certain manner of +striking the heels of his moccasins against his sides. The result could +not have been more satisfactory. + +"Whirlwind is a bad horse," said Deerfoot, feeling that it was time to +have a little sport with him. "He ran away from Deerfoot on purpose. If +he had had any sense he would have left the Assiniboines and set out to +find Deerfoot instead of making Deerfoot travel so far to find him." + +It would be absurd to pretend that a horse, even with the rare +intelligence of Whirlwind, could grasp the meaning of these words. +However, he understood the sharp pinch which his master gave him on the +side of his neck, followed by a brisk slap with his hand. The stallion +reached his head around and nipped at the leg of Deerfoot, who drew it +back and flipped the nose of the animal. + +Then Whirlwind flung his head around his other shoulder and snapped at +the leg on that side, which was hardly snatched out of the way in time +to escape. Deerfoot gently smote the nose to remind the steed that with +all his strength and wisdom the youth was still his master. Thus they +parried and played and plagued each other until Deerfoot, with that +curious refinement of cruelty which we often show to those we love +most, pretended to be offended. + +"If Whirlwind wishes to bite Deerfoot he may do so." + +And to show he meant what he said he reached forward and placed his +hand between the lips of the horse. The latter instantly opened his +jaws, so as to inclose the hand with his teeth. A slight effort would +have crushed the fingers out of all semblance of symmetry and beauty. +Whirlwind did bring his jaws nearly together, but took good care that +the pressure was not sufficient to harm a fly. + +Deerfoot's heart smoke him. He could not stand this cruelty to as true +a friend as ever lived. Resting his rifle across his thighs, so as to +leave his hands free, he leaned forward, and, inclosing the satin neck +in his grasp, gave the noble creature as fervent an embrace as wooer +ever gave to sweetheart. + +"Deerfoot loves Whirlwind, and his heart would have been sad all his +life if he had not found him. None shall take him away from Deerfoot +again. Deerfoot knows that we shall meet in that land that our Father +is saving for those who do His will, and then Deerfoot and Whirlwind +shall hunt and roam the forests and prairies forever." + +If the meaning of the words was vague to the stallion, he could not +mistake the meaning of the embrace and the reposing of the side of the +Shawanoe's face in the luxuriant mane. He was fully repaid for the +indignities he had suffered and the grief that had come to him because +of the separation of the two. Had Whirlwind been able to put his ideas +in words it is conceivable that he would have reproached the Shawanoe +for deserting and leaving him among strangers. Had he not done so, no +search with its attendant dangers would have been forced upon the +youth. + +And had this rebuke been given to Deerfoot, surely he would have +admitted the justice of the charge, for we know how he reproached +himself for his conduct. But we blame others for ills which we know are +caused by ourselves, and we chide unjustly those whom we love most, +knowing all the time how unjust we are, and that if we loved less the +reproof would not be given at all. + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +A MISHAP. + + +So Deerfoot the Shawanoe rode into the night, his heart aglow with +gratitude because of the success of his venture. Whirlwind was his and +he felt no misgiving over losing him again, and the steed himself would +fight against recapture. + +The animal kept to a walk, for to go faster would have been imprudent +if not dangerous. He was not traveling over the course followed by +Deerfoot in threading his way to the Assiniboine camp. The road was +rough and strange to both horse and rider. All that the youth knew of a +certainty was that he was journeying southward. He could tell that much +by observing the stars that had served him so often as a compass. + +Nor was there any necessity for haste. It was impossible for the +Assiniboines to trail him until the sun appeared in the sky, when +Whirlwind would easily leave the fleetest of their ponies out of sight. +So no fear remained in the heart of the dusky youth. Speaking now and +then to the animal, patting his neck and shoulder, or playfully +pinching the glossy skin, he rode onward for several hours. He was not +in need of sleep, and Whirlwind had been given nearly a whole day of +rest. It was no task therefore for either to maintain the journey. + +Deerfoot's intention was to ride until midnight, when the two would +rest, resuming their journey at sunrise and pushing hard until they +reached the villages of the Blackfeet. It was late when the stallion +splashed through a small brook at the foot of a ridge, where Deerfoot +decided to dismount for the remainder of the night. Slipping from the +back of the horse he pressed his ear to the earth, but heard nothing to +cause him disquiet. If the Assiniboines were hunting for him they were +too far off to cause concern. + +While Deerfoot was thus employed, Whirlwind stood as motionless as a +statue, waiting for his commands. The Shawanoe was in the act of rising +to his feet when the steed emitted the slightest possible sniff. He was +looking toward the top of the ridge immediately in front, standing like +a pointer dog, with his ears pricked forward and head high in air. + +Glancing in the same direction, Deerfoot saw the figure of a buck that +had come up the other side of the ridge and halted on the crest, as if +he scented something amiss. He could not see the two below him, but his +own form was thrown into relief against the starlit sky. The beautiful +creature with the branching horns, the delicate ears, the shapely head +and body, looked as if stamped in ink in the dim star-gleam. + +Deerfoot touched the shoulder of Whirlwind as a warning for him to keep +still. The intelligent animal maintained his statue-like pose, and the +youth began stealing toward the buck, his cocked rifle grasped with +both hands and ready to bring to a level and fire on the instant. The +space between the two was fifty or sixty yards, which would have been +nothing by daylight. The youth wished to decrease it as much as he +could because of the darkness, so as to run no risk of missing his aim. + +It may not sound poetical, but it is only simple fact that with the +sight of the buck unconscious of his danger the dominant emotion of the +Shawanoe was a sense of ravening hunger. It was a long time since he +had partaken of food and his appetite was worthy of Victor Shelton. He +meant that that buck should fill the aching void that vexed him. + +A phantom gliding over the ground would have given out no more noise +than was made by the moccasins of the Shawanoe; but the timid animal +snuffed danger and wheeled to dash away. At the instant of doing so, +Deerfoot fired, sending the ball into the body just back of a fore leg. +The _cervus_ species rarely or never fall, even when stricken through +the heart, knowing which, Deerfoot dashed up the slope, knife in hand, +and made after the wounded buck, which could be heard threshing among +the stones and underbrush. He was still floundering and running when +overtaken by the youth, who quickly ended his suffering. + +The next act of Deerfoot was to reload his rifle, after which he cut a +goodly piece from the side of the game and carried it back to where +Whirlwind was waiting. The venison was washed and dressed, after which +the youth groped about for fuel with which to start a fire. This proved +quite a task, but he succeeded after a time, and then made one of the +most substantial meals he had eaten in a long while. When it was +completed hardly a fragment was left, and he felt he was provided for +in the way of nourishment for a day or two to come, though he saw no +reason to fear any such deprivation of food. + +The Shawanoe could never forget his caution. While there was little +probability of any of the Assiniboines being in the neighborhood, yet +it was possible there were, and it might be they had observed the +twinkle of the fire he had kindled and then allowed to die out. He +remounted his horse and headed more to the westward, for he had a long +way to travel to reach the Blackfoot country on the other side of the +Rocky Mountains. + +The youth was riding forward, glancing to the right and left, on the +lookout for a suitable place for camping, when he noticed that while +the ground over which he was passing was more level than usual, a high +ridge loomed up on the left, rising in some places to a height of +several hundred feet. After a time a similar formation appeared on the +right. This showed that he was passing through a valley-like +depression, but he had gone a comparatively short distance when he +observed that the two mountain ranges, if such they might be +considered, gradually converged. He turned to the left and at the base +of the ridge dismounted. + +"Here we will stay for the rest of the night," he said to Whirlwind. +"Deerfoot feels that hard work is before us and it is wise to save our +strength." + +Since there was no saddle or bridle to be taken from the stallion, his +master turned him loose, first kissing his nose and affectionately +patting his neck. The horse wandered off a few steps to spend the hours +by himself, while the youth laid his blanket on the ground and wrapped +himself in it. No water was near, nor was there enough grass growing +for Whirlwind to crop, but neither cared for a little thing like that. + +Deerfoot slept soundly till roused by the licking of his cheek by his +faithful friend, who was standing at his head and looking down in his +face as revealed in the dim morning light. The night was gone and it +had brought no alarm to either. Casting aside the blanket, Deerfoot +sprang to his feet and surveyed his surroundings. + +That which first attracted his attention was the convergence of the +massive walls to the southeast. Less than half a mile away they came +within a hundred feet of each other, thus forming one of the canons +that are common in mountainous countries. The question which Deerfoot +asked himself was whether it was probable the two joined. If so, he was +entering a pocket from which he would be forced to withdraw. The middle +of the valley showed that at certain times, perhaps when the snows +melted, a stream coursed its way through the canyon, but the water came +from the front and flowed toward the horseman into the open country to +the rear. Had it taken the opposite course there would have been no +hesitation on his part, for he would have known that an outlet was in +advance through which Whirlwind could pass. On the other hand, it might +be that the ridges united and the torrent had its source in the water +which poured over the rocks at the head. If this proved to be the fact, +Deerfoot would be obliged to retreat and make a change of course. + +His belief was that the ridges did not join and it was therefore +prudent for him to go on. Two causes led him to this conclusion: the +ground was favorable for the hoofs of his horse, and the course of the +canyon was the direction he wished to follow. It was a small matter +anyway, for an hour or two loss of time could make no special +difference. He spoke to Whirlwind, who stepped off with his usual proud +stride. Now that daylight had come and the ground was inviting, the +steed of his own accord broke into an easy gallop, which his rider did +not check. + +Arriving at the farthest point visible at the moment of starting, +Deerfoot found that though the walls drew somewhat closer they did not +meet for at least a half mile in front, where again a change of course +hid the actual truth. He was now following the black, sandy bed of a +stream, packed so hard that it gave an ideal floor for a horse's hoofs. + +The Shawanoe had not reached the turn in the canyon when he made an +alarming discovery. Looking to the rear he discovered fully a dozen +horsemen coming toward him on a walk. They were probably a half mile +off, and no doubt were pursuing him. He would not have felt any +misgiving but for the instant suspicion that these Indians were +Assiniboines and the other division of the party from whom he had +retaken Whirlwind. They must have recognized the black stallion, and, +if so, of course knew he had been captured by the Nez Perce, as they +supposed him to be. On no other supposition could their action be +explained. + +Without checking his steed, Deerfoot turned and pointed his glass at +the red men. One glance was sufficient. They were Assiniboines, and no +doubt those for whom the other group were waiting in the grove miles +distant. + +Where they had come from with such suddenness was more than the +Shawanoe could guess. It mattered naught since they were there, and his +situation was not only unpleasant, but likely to prove dangerous. If +the canyon closed he was fairly caught and would have to make a +desperate fight to extricate himself. If it was open in front he had +little to fear. + +He spoke to Whirlwind, who instantly increased his speed. The +Assiniboines seemed to make no effort to lessen the distance between +themselves and the fugitive. This looked bad, for it indicated that the +Shawanoe was riding toward a shut door and would fall into their power +like ripe fruit shaken from a limb. + +When Deerfoot reached the next curve in the canyon he perceived that +only a little way in front it curved again. He decided at once to +settle the doubt in his mind, for, if the canyon was a blind one, every +rod of advance added to his danger. The walls drew steadily nearer and +he began to fear that they really met not far off. If obliged to turn +back he should do so without further delay. + +Checking Whirlwind he slipped to the ground and ran to the side of the +ravine. He left his blanket on the back of the horse, and leaned his +rifle against the base of the rocks, up which he began climbing with +the nimbleness of a sailor ascending the rigging of a ship. His +intention was to reach the level ground above, from which he could gain +a view that would tell him whether it was safe to go any farther into +the canyon or whether he must make instant retreat. + +From the foot of the mountain wall to the top was fully forty feet, and +it was perpendicular all the way; but the face was so rugged that he +went up without trouble, only turning a little to the right now and +then to gain a better support for his hands and feet. The stallion +stood motionless and watching him with what must have been wondering +interest. + +As he ascended Deerfoot glanced down the ravine and saw the +Assiniboines still coming with their horses on a walk. This pointed to +the probability that the Shawanoe had really entered a pocket and his +enemies saw no need of haste, since they felt sure of their victim. And +yet with all his acumen the Shawanoe erred in explaining the +deliberation of his pursuers. + +At last the agile climber reached the upper edge of the ravine, and it +only remained for him to lift himself a foot farther to gain the view +which would reveal the truth of the situation. He extended his hand +upward to secure the grip that was to raise his head above the level. +As he did so he rested it on something cold and soft, which he +instantly recognized as a coiled rattlesnake. + +Deerfoot shared the shivering disgust which nearly every person feels +for crawling reptiles. Nothing was so hideous to him as the _crotalus_, +and when he caught sight of one he rarely allowed it to escape. An +electric shock thrilled through him as he snatched back his hand in +time to avoid the sting, for the snake must have been as much +astonished as he by its disturbance. In the horror of the contact the +Shawanoe forgot everything else for the instant, and letting go his +hold, dropped to the bottom of the gorge. + +He realized his mishap the instant it took place and tried desperately +to seize some obstruction that would check his descent, but could not +do so. He struck the bottom of the canyon, landing on both feet, with a +twinge of pain that was like a dagger thrust in his ankle. + +But brief as was Deerfoot's descent, he had seen something terrifying +while it was going on. The rattlesnake so rudely disturbed as it lay in +coil (though it sometimes strikes when not in that position), darted +its gaping mouth at the hand which flashed out of its reach. Strange as +it may seem, it was lying on the very edge of the gorge, so close +indeed that the blow which struck vacancy carried it over, and it came +tumbling, looping and writhing after Deerfoot, at whose feet it fell, +bruised and stunned by the impact. Before it could strike again he had +seized his rifle and crushed out its life. + +The excitement of the moment sustained him, but with the blow he sank +to the ground as if shot through the heart. His left ankle had been +severely wrenched and could not support an ounce of his weight. The +pain was so intense that but for his iron will he would have swooned. +With wonderful pluck and self-control he carefully raised himself and +stood on the right foot, with the other leg bent at the knee and its +foot held clear of the ground. A red-hot needle driven into and through +the ankle could not have caused more agony. + +But though his face and compressed lips were pale, not a murmur of +complaint escaped him. Looking up at his steed he said, with his old, +winning smile: + +"Will Whirlwind take care of Deerfoot, for he cannot take care of +himself?" + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +ENEMIES AND FRIENDS. + + +The black stallion knew his master was in trouble. Stepping forward he +thrust forward his nose and licked his face. Deerfoot rested one arm on +his mane, the other hand holding his rifle. Then Whirlwind, without a +word, kneeled on one knee, so as to lower his shoulders. With a single +hop the young Shawanoe leaped upon his back and the steed immediately +stood on all-fours. + +"Now, my friend, show them what you can do in the way of running." + +The incident had taken only a few moments, but brief as was the time it +had allowed the Assiniboines to decrease the space between them and the +Shawanoe. Singular as it seemed, they still failed to hurry. They held +their horses at a walk, and Deerfoot for the first time began to +suspect the truth. + +Whirlwind was off with the speed of the wind. His motion gave pain to +the rider, but it was less than when he stood with one foot on the +ground. So long as he had the steed under him he felt little cause for +fear. + +The theory which had suddenly assumed shape in the mind of Deerfoot was +that the pursuers wished to hold him in the ravine while another party +passed around to the other entrance. He would thus be placed between +two fires and his position made tenfold more perilous than ever. It may +be said that if this trick succeeded the doom of both Deerfoot and +Whirlwind would be sealed. + +And it was precisely the stratagem which the Assiniboines had +attempted. + +It will now be understood why the Shawanoe sent his steed flying up the +gorge at such a tremendous burst of speed that he rapidly drew away +from the group behind him. He meant to get out of the ravine before he +was shut off in front. No doubt longer remained that it was open at no +great distance in advance. + +The space was less than a third of a mile after making the last turn. +Deerfoot would have been glad had it been greater, for that much more +opportunity would be given for the use of the stallion's fleetness. + +The Shawanoe descried the open door. The walls fell away, leaving an +interval of a hundred yards between, the bottom of the ravine slightly +ascended, the ridges gradually dropped to the level of the earth, and +the country was spread out as before he rode into the canyon the night +previous. + +From the back of the flying steed Deerfoot kept his eye on the space, +expecting every moment to see the other Assiniboines dash into view and +sweep down upon him. He had fixed his line of action. He would charge +straight at them, even if they numbered a dozen, using first his rifle +and then his knife, should a chance present itself to bring the latter +into play. + +With every bound of Whirlwind the hopes of his rider rose. It looked as +if the race had been won by the superb stallion. A few more strides and +all his enemies would be thrown to the rear. + +The next moment Whirlwind burst out of the ravine into the open +country, and in the same instant came face to face with another +horseman. He was the Assiniboine chieftain, who alone had ridden hard +along the side of the canyon on the ground above, in order to head off +the flying fugitive, and had arrived just in time to do so. He scorned +to take any companion with him, for he feared no living man and was +sure of overcoming the audacious stranger that had roused his fury. + +The Assiniboine must have heard the thunder of the approaching hoofs, +for he had checked his own horse, on which he sat awaiting the +appearance of the Shawanoe. When the latter caught sight of his face he +had his rifle at his shoulder and was in the act of pressing the +trigger. + +Deerfoot saw he had no time to use his own weapon, for quickly as he +might aim it the other would be discharged first. In the language of +the modern West, the Assiniboine "had the drop" on the Shawanoe. + +There was but one thing to do, and Deerfoot did it in the twinkling of +an eye. He flung his body to the other side of his steed, sustaining +himself by bending his toes over the base of the stallion's neck. When +I add that the foot with which he performed this remarkable bit of +horsemanship was the one with the sprained ankle, you may faintly +imagine the wrenching torture he suffered. Only by a superhuman effort +did he keep control of his senses. + +The Assiniboine fired at the moment of the lightning-like shift of +position, and Deerfoot heard the zip of the bullet as it sped across +the space covered less than a second before by his body. + +There is a lurking devil in the most saintly disposition, and that +which slumbered in the breast of the young Shawanoe now flamed to a +white heat. Swinging back to the upright posture he called: + +"Now, Whirlwind, run him down!" + +[Illustration: "Now, Whirlwind, Run Him Down."] + +The stallion felt the pressure of the knees, understood the command, +and ablaze with rage, charged like a cyclone for the other horse. In a +flash he crashed into the animal, hurling him sidelong to the earth and +rolling him completely over from the terrific force of the impact. + +But his rider was a fine horseman and leaped to the ground before the +collision. Whirling about he faced the Shawanoe, with knife drawn, for +there was no time to reload his gun. + +He was now at the mercy of Deerfoot, whose weapon was loaded. But for +the disabled limb he would have leaped to the earth and assailed the +other. He would have done the same had there been two enemies before +him; he would have done the same had there been three; but he was not +the fool to engage in a fight when he had but a single leg to stand +upon. + +The panic-stricken horse, having clambered to his feet, dashed away. +Whirlwind assumed his statue-like pose and Deerfoot brought his rifle +to a level, with the Assiniboine staring into the muzzle. + +The fight had been of the cyclone order, but, brief as it was, Deerfoot +had become himself again. He was the Christian who could not shed the +blood of one that was unable to defend himself, even though that one +was his deadly enemy. + +The Assiniboine had dropped his gun when assuming his position at bay, +and it lay several feet away on the ground. Lowering his own weapon, +Deerfoot pointed after the fleeing horse and said sternly in the tongue +of the Blackfeet: + +"Run! run after the horse!" + +The gesture, as much as the words, explained the command. It was so +unparalleled, so utterly unexpected, that the Assiniboine stood in a +daze. Deerfoot knew that the report of the gun would speedily bring the +warriors to the spot, and there was not a minute to spare. He repeated +his order more sharply than before and accompanied it with a +threatening lifting of his gun to a level. + +The other could not misunderstand the significance of voice and +gesture. He stepped forward to pick up his rifle. + +"Stop!" shouted the Shawanoe, before the other could stoop. "Leave it +where it is! Follow the horse." + +The hammer of the leveled rifle was at full cock. Still unable fully to +comprehend all that had taken place, the chieftain faced about and +broke into a lope after his horse, which acted as if it would keep up +its pace for the remainder of the day. + +Deerfoot waited till the chief had gone a hundred paces, when heading +the other way he gave the word to Whirlwind, whom, however, he held +down to a walk. The rider wished to witness developments. + +Looking back he saw the Assiniboine motionless and gazing after him +with emotions that can hardly be imagined or described. He stood thus +for a minute, when he started on a run to recover his rifle from where +it lay on the ground. Just before reaching the spot the party of +horsemen emerged from the mouth of the canyon and paused while their +leader rejoined them. + +It would be interesting to know how he squared matters with his +warriors. It would have required a vivid imagination and a genius in +the way of invention to explain how it was his horse was just vanishing +in the distance; how the chief was in the act of recovering his weapon, +and more than all, how it came about that the youthful warrior of a +strange tribe, who had already slain one Assiniboine--though that was +yet unknown to this party--was riding leisurely off on the back of the +special pet of the chieftain. If the Assiniboine was wise he made a +clean breast of it, and insisted that the dusky stranger was a marvel +in his way whom it was exceedingly unwise to push into a corner. + +The chagrin of the Assiniboine party was not soothed by the action of +Deerfoot, who, having spared the life of an enemy, felt himself +justified in "rubbing it in," so to speak. He faced Whirlwind toward +the group, held him motionless, and, swinging his rifle over his head, +indulged in a series of tantalizing shouts that were anything but +soothing to the chief and his friends. How they ached to get the +terrible young warrior into their power! What exquisite vengeance they +would have wreaked upon him! + +But such bliss was impossible. They knew what speed the black stallion +possessed, and it was not supposable that his rider meant to challenge +all of them to combat. So they maintained a glum silence as he rode +from view. + +Meanwhile, Deerfoot found he must give attention to the ankle, whose +condition had been aggravated by the fight with the Assiniboine leader. +It was much swollen and the pain was torturing. Still his bravery and +self-command prevented anything in the nature of murmuring. In truth, +he would have suffered death without outcry. + +The remarkable youth found a strange consolation. He was familiar with +the story of the Saviour's death on the cross and remembered the nails +that were driven through the hands and feet. + +"_He_ suffered from four wounds, besides having a spear thrust into his +side. Deerfoot has only one hurt in his foot and that does not bleed. +_He_ had the weight of the world's guilt crushing his heart. What are +Deerfoot's sufferings compared with His? It is my Father's will and +therefore the heart of Deerfoot is glad." + +Failing to see a sign of strangers in the neighborhood, the Shawanoe +drew Whirlwind down to a walk and halted at the first mountain stream, +which happened to be no larger than the one where he had broiled his +supper the night before. + +The moment Whirlwind saw that his master wished to dismount he sank +upon both knees. His sympathetic act touched Deerfoot, who, stepping +carefully upon the well limb, patted the neck of the steed and thanked +him. + +"Deerfoot would be helpless but for Whirlwind. They must now stick +together as never before." + +Hopping to the brook the youth slipped off his moccasin and removed the +stocking. The swollen ankle was as sensitive as a boil. Dipping the +stocking in the icy water he rang it almost dry and rubbed the limb, +gently at first and then more vigorously until it was in a glow. This +was soothing and gave partial relief, but much pain remained. An injury +of that nature takes a long time to subside. + +Having never suffered from illness or wounds, the Shawanoe was without +any remedy at command, nor did he know aught of the many medicaments +which his race, as well as the white people, use. Had the hurt been a +simple cut or wound he would have given it no heed, but his sprain +forced itself upon his notice. + +He finished rubbing the ankle and carefully drew on the stocking, with +Whirlwind sympathetically watching him, and doubtless longing for some +method of giving relief. I wonder whether the creature recalled that +day, many weeks before, when his young master rubbed his injured knee +so tenderly and ministered to him until he had fully recovered. We +cannot fathom the mysteries of the brain in animals of a high order of +intelligence, and it is not for us to deny that such might have been +the fact. + +Suddenly the stallion turned toward a pile of rocks to the left and +emitted his faint, warning neigh. Deerfoot was up in a twinkling, +despite the additional suffering caused by his action, and seized his +rifle resting near. As he did so an Indian appeared from behind the +rocks and came toward him. A glance showed him to be the dwarf with +whom Deerfoot had had his singular meeting when journeying northward. + +The red man of short stature took long wabbling strides, made numerous +gestures and grimaces and rapidly uttered words, not one of which was +understood by the Shawanoe. Still chattering, gesticulating and +grinning he came forward, without heeding the black steed, flung his +long bow to the ground, and kneeling down, gently lifted the foot of +Deerfoot, who had not yet drawn on his moccasin. The visitor saw that +the limb was injured and tenderly rested the foot upon his knee, the +owner thereof making no objection, gently turned down the stocking and +spent a minute or two in inspecting the swollen ankle. Then with a +sympathetic aspiration he slowly stroked it with his hand. In doing so +he drew downward each time and never rubbed the surface upward. + +There is something in magnetism, and Deerfoot was sure of a slight +cessation of the pain, though the relief was not marked. When the +caressing had been repeated a number of times, the dwarf softly laid +the foot on the ground and rose to his feet. Another vigorous discharge +of unintelligible words followed, and he wabbled rapidly off beyond the +rocks from behind which he had come a short time before. + +Since he left his bow lying on the ground where he had flung it, +Deerfoot knew he had gone in quest of some remedy and would soon +return. He therefore kept his seat on the ground and patiently awaited +the other's coming. + +In a few minutes the dwarf reappeared, bearing in his hand a bunch of +green leaves. The twigs were pinnated, and at the base of each leaflet, +where it joined the common peticle, was a single crimson berry, +resembling the common wintergreen, but the genus was unknown to the +Shawanoe, though he knew something of medicinal herbs. + +Dividing the twigs with their leaves and berries into halves, the good +Samaritan laid one pile on the ground, pointing to it, and still +chattering. Deerfoot knew he wished to direct his attention to the +healing plant, and he nodded his head to signify he understood and +would remember his request. + +Then, as deftly as a girl, the dusky friend picked the berries from the +twigs in the other bunch. They filled the palm of one hand, which he +held out for Deerfoot to inspect. The Shawanoe nodded again. The other +wabbled back to the rocks, but did not pass out of sight. Picking up a +bit of stone, he began crushing the berries upon a projection of the +rocks. It took but a brief time to turn them into a yellow, sticky mass +which emitted a slightly aromatic odor. Returning to the patient, he +skillfully spread the poultice on several of the larger leaves, laid +them over and around the swollen ankle, and then, as gently as a mother +with her babe, drew the stocking over it, so as to hold the poultice in +place. + +Deerfoot leaned back, resting his body on his elbows, and heaved a +long, grateful sigh. The relief was bliss itself. For a minute or two +he believed the injury was fully healed, but a slight movement of the +foot proved that this was not the fact. Nevertheless, the effect of the +crushed berries was magical. As he looked up in the homely, twisted +countenance, his expression spoke his gratitude. The dwarf grinned. The +language of thankfulness needs no interpreter. Deerfoot came to the +upright posture, and, reaching forward, took one of the stranger's +hands in his own and patted it, murmuring his thanks. + +The dwarf pointed to the twigs and berries remaining untouched and said +something, which was made clear by the rapid flitting of his forefinger +from them to the wounded member. The meaning was plain. The patient was +to use them as the others had been used. Deerfoot signified in his +usual way that he understood the direction. + +The dwarf stood for a few minutes silent, with his eyes on the face of +the Shawanoe seated before him. Then he spoke again, and Deerfoot would +have given much to have understood the words, but he could not form the +remotest idea of their meaning. The visitor stopped and picked up his +bow from the ground, turned and swung with his awkward gait up the +slight slope, passed from sight behind the pile of rocks, and the +Shawanoe never saw or heard of him again. + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +IN THE ROCKIES. + + +There was wonderful virtue in the remedy used by the dwarf Indian. You +and I know that in many a mountaineer's cabin and barbarian's wigwam +are found curatives which surpass anything known to what we call +medical science. The proofs of this fact are too numerous to be +questioned. + +As Deerfoot rode away with Whirlwind on a walk, he knew his hurt had +been greatly benefited. With his foot hanging, the flow of blood +downward tended to increase the pain, but there was not only less of it +than at any time since his mishap, but it was perceptibly decreasing. +The swelling was going down, for the stocking was becoming looser. He +timidly tapped the ribs of the stallion with his heel and was delighted +to find it caused less of a twinge than he expected. + +At the first water he paused, but would not allow Whirlwind to kneel to +help him dismount. He let himself down rather gingerly and did not +suffer therefrom. At the side of the little stream he examined his +injury. The swelling was markedly less and he was able to press it +without wincing. He had brought away the surplus berries, but, instead +of using them, moistened the old binding and replaced it. It might be +that he would not be able to find more of the remedy, and it was +prudent to husband the supply. Observant as he was, he did not recall +ever having seen the shrub growing, and was certain it was not found in +Ohio or Kentucky. + +One potent factor in the rapid recovery of the Shawanoe must not be +overlooked; that was his own superb health and condition. You need not +be reminded that when anything goes amiss with us physically, nature +sets to work at once to right it, and the most that medical skill can +do is to sit by and watch for contingencies and give assistance as +opportunity offers, which is less frequent than many think. A system +that has not been weakened by dissipation or the violation of the laws +of health will do wonders in the way of repairing disease or injury. + +It was not yet noon when Deerfoot became so hopeful and curious that he +suddenly slipped from the back of his horse without checking his walk. +Whirlwind must have been startled, for he instantly stopped and turned +his head to learn what it meant. + +"Don't worry," said his master with his familiar chuckle. "Deerfoot is +almost well and will soon be himself again." + +He ventured to bear a part of his weight on the weak leg. It caused a +twinge, and he instantly shifted to the other foot, but with the +transference of weight the pain departed, which was one of the best of +signs. + +The days of miracles passed long ago, and with all the virtues that may +linger in the Thomsonian system of medicine, no possibility existed of +the Shawanoe regaining the full use of his limb for several days to +come. None the less, his recovery was astonishingly rapid, for, as I +have said, his perfect vigor and healthfulness of body greatly aided in +such recovery. Added to this was the intelligence he used. While he +frequently tested and experimented with the injury, he did not venture +too far. Now and then he carefully shifted a part of his weight to his +left limb, then he hobbled a few steps, but stopped immediately at the +first warning twinge. It may be said he encouraged the ankle to do its +best to get well. + +It was a little past meridian when he reached a place which showed a +considerable growth of grass, and letting himself down to the ground, +he told Whirlwind to attend to his own dinner. As for himself, he +preferred to wait until nightfall, or the next day. At present all his +attention was given to his hurt. + +He decided, after inspecting the bandage, to replace it with a new one. +He therefore flung the old one aside and mashed the berries and applied +them as the dwarf had done. But the injured limb had so decreased in +size that the stocking failed to hold it in place. The motion of the +horse caused the bandage to slip over the foot. This was remedied by +taking some of the threads of fringe from the skirt of his hunting +shirt and tying them round the poultice. He expected the increased +pressure to hurt, but to his pleased surprise the opposite effect +resulted. + +It had been in his mind to construct a crude crutch to aid in hobbling +around, but he decided not to do so. If his recovery continued without +relapse he could do well enough without such aid. + +On the journey from the Ohio to the Pacific, as well as during their +intimacy in the new State, Deerfoot and Mul-tal-la had talked so much +about the home of the latter that the Shawanoe felt himself well +informed. A hundred years ago that tribe numbered several thousand, and +they lived in villages, some of which were long distances from one +another. The country over which they roamed covered thousands of square +miles of mountain, prairie and stream. Mul-tal-la described his own +village as consisting of more than a hundred lodges, located near the +middle of the Blackfoot territory. The tepees were strung along the +eastern bank of a stream of considerable size, and was the +dwelling-place of Taggarak, the most famous of the Blackfoot war chiefs +and the head of the other sachems, most of whom lived in different +villages. Deerfoot had formed so clear a picture in his own mind that +he believed he could identify the Indian town at first sight, though it +might be its resemblance to others would prevent such recognition. + +The Blackfoot country lies to the east of the Rocky Mountains, while he +was on the west of the stupendous range. It was necessary, therefore, +to make his way through and over the backbone of the continent, in +order to rejoin his friends. Inasmuch as the land of the Assiniboines +was not only farther east, but many leagues to the northward, it will +be understood that the party that had tried to run off Whirlwind had +ventured on a most extensive raid, which brought them no reward except +that of having slain several of Chief Amokeat's Nez Perces. + +A requirement for getting through the mountains was an avenue, since +the passage could be effected in no other way except by flying, and +Deerfoot was not yet ready to try that means. + +Using all the woodcraft of which he was master, he spent the remainder +of the day in searching for such a pass. He scanned every part of his +field of vision, but the day was drawing to a close before anything +like success came to him. He had learned that the warriors to the east +and west of the Rockies made journeys now and then back and forth. +Sometimes these were raiding expeditions, at other times were merely +rambles or visits, when the red men proved themselves capable of +hospitality and friendship. + +These people must be acquainted with the readiest means of travel, and +wherever they walked or rode they left inevitable signs to guide +others. The sun was still two hours above the horizon when Deerfoot +came upon a plainly marked trail, leading almost due east and west. +Without hesitation he turned into it. Instead of being a comparatively +narrow passage, however, like that traversed by Mul-tal-la and George +and Victor Shelton when they thought they were embroiled with the +Shoshones, it was two or three miles wide, and even wider in some +places. The ground was so depressed that it partook of the nature of a +valley, through the middle of which a considerable stream of water had +flowed, fed no doubt, as was the rule, by the melting snows and ice of +the mountains. + +The surface of this pass varied greatly. There were portions where +boulders, rocks and ravines seemed to bar all progress, but these +obstructions, upon a closer approach, revealed passages which could be +easily traversed by horse or animal. Then came long stretches of fairly +level land, where grass, trees and shrubbery were abundant. The +mountains towered on the right and left, and now and then directly in +front, some of the peaks piercing the sky far above the snow line. + +Deerfoot would not have dared to attempt this passage but for the +proofs that it had been traversed before by others. In fact, shortly +after he made the change of direction he came upon a spot where a large +party had encamped not long previous. It was too early in the day to +halt for the night, and he allowed the stallion to pass on. + +An hour later, when casting about for a suitable camping site, he +descried an Indian party not far in advance, but a fourth of a mile to +the left. While they were using the same pass with himself, they were +traversing another portion and pursuing the same direction as he. + +Not convinced that it was well to seek their company, the Shawanoe +brought his glass to bear and surveyed the motley group that were +straggling eastward. The sight was interesting even to him, for the +Indians were composed of warriors, squaws, children and pappooses, +evidently migrating to a new home. They had eight or ten scraggly +ponies, each walking between two poles that served as shafts and +extended so far to the rear that they dragged on the ground. Thus they +served as runners or crude sleds. Held in place by thongs and +crosspieces, the primitive wagon gave a resting place for tired squaws +and children, their lazy husbands, or the furs and luggage of the +party. The primitive contrivances left a peculiar trail. + +The Indians numbered perhaps fifty or three score, and had nothing +attractive in their slouching, untidy appearance, which suggested so +many dusky tramps on their way to quarters that offered a better +opportunity for begging. Deerfoot had no wish to gain a closer +acquaintance and kept well to the south, so as to be sure of passing +without mingling with the company. As the ground was favorable he put +Whirlwind at a moderate gallop. + +The dusky strangers showed their keenness of vision by observing the +stranger almost as soon as he descried them. He saw several of the +warriors who were on foot point toward him. They seemed to expect +Deerfoot to come forward, but, when he did not do so, showed no further +interest in him. + +The wish to keep clear of the uninviting throng caused the youth to +ride on until the gathering gloom told him night was at hand. He then +saw he had come to another place that had served as a camp for those +who had traveled the way before him. There were the little stream of +icy water, the rank grass, the scattered undergrowth and the boulders +and rocks of every size and variety. + +The air was so chilly that Deerfoot began gathering wood for a fire, +though he had nothing in the nature of food for an evening meal. I have +shown, however, that that was a matter of small account to him. There +was more than enough for Whirlwind, who, leaving his master to himself, +began edging up the pass, cropping the choicest grass on the way. The +Shawanoe had to grope in many places before he collected enough fuel. +He heaped a part against the cold bare face of the rock, several paces +from the winding brook, whose waters were not only clear, but of the +temperature of ice itself. + +With his usual deftness, Deerfoot soon had the fire blazing. He had not +seen living man or animal since his sight of the migrating Indians, and +he did not think it likely he would meet any before morning. The past +day and night had been so stirring that the present rest was grateful. +He assumed an easy posture, half reclining on his blanket, and, +supporting the upper part of his body on one elbow, he drew out his +Bible and held it so that the firelight fell on the printed page. + +He read for a full hour. Many of the passages were familiar to him, and +he could repeat them--as he often did when riding or walking +alone--without glancing within the volume. He read some of the chapters +a second and third time, dwelling on certain verses, as if to make sure +he lost nothing of their wonderful significance and beauty. Finally, he +closed the book and placed it back in its usual resting place. + +The fire was sinking and he flung more wood on the blaze. Then moving +beyond the circle of light, he gathered his blanket about his +shoulders, and, finding his ankle free from pain, leaned back against +the face of the rock and gave himself over to meditation upon the +fascinating and yet awesome mysteries of the Word and of the Author of +them all. + +Everything favored the sweet, solemn reverie. He was utterly alone, so +far as any of his kind was concerned. He could hear the soft impact of +Whirlwind's hoof now and then as he shifted his position and continued +nibbling the grass. The night wind sighed around the massive rock, +fanning the blaze, and sometimes rising to a moan as it careered upward +and swirled about the stupendous peaks towering near at hand. Far aloft +he caught the faint honk of the wild geese hurrying southward from the +Arctic winter that would soon lock the world in its rigid fetters. The +dismal howl of a mountain wolf sounded far off in the solitude and +seemed to linger tremblingly in the air. The silence was all the more +impressive because of these disturbances which belonged to the time and +place. + +Leaning back against the rugged rock, in which a slight warmth was +perceptible from the contact farther away with the blaze, Deerfoot's +thoughts drifted to other places, scenes and persons. He recalled his +rambles with Ned Preston, Jo Springer, Jim Turner and the quaint negro +youth known as "Blossom," when all passed through many stirring +experiences, as you learned long since in the "Boy Pioneer Series;" and +of Jack Carleton and Otto Relstaub in the "Log Cabin" stories. Fred +Linden and Terry Clark were to come later. + +Deerfoot had known many men who later gained a place in history. You +will recall the high esteem in which he was held by General W. H. +Harrison, Governor of Indiana Territory, and afterward President of the +United States. It was he who declared, when a Senator in Washington, +that he looked upon the young Shawanoe as the greatest Indian in many +respects that ever lived, with natural abilities superior to those of +the renowned Tecumseh, who, nevertheless, holds the most exalted +position in the estimate of those that came after him. + +Daniel Boone, the renowned pioneer, regarded the youth highly, while +Simon Kenton, himself one of the best judges of men, was as unstinted +in his praise as Governor Harrison. The acceptance of Christianity by +this remarkable youth shut out forever the political fame and power +that he would have assuredly won had he refused the true faith and been +an Indian in his traits, tastes and ambitions. But the sweet, +soul-satisfying happiness that was always his he would not have +exchanged for the highest honors the world can give. + +[Illustration: Deerfoot Lost in Reverie by the Camp Fire.] + +The musings of Deerfoot took a daintier, softer, tenderer tint. His +thoughts flew across the thousands of miles of forest, river, mountain +and prairie to one whose image was never absent from his heart, and +whom he hoped to see again and all in good time call _wife_. He talked +to none of her, for the theme was too sacred to be shared with another, +but next to his religion it was the sweetest, dearest consolation of +his life. + + "In the rainbow-tinted forest, + Where the sleepy waters flow,-- + Roamed I with a dark-haired maiden, + In an autumn long ago; + And her dimpled hand was resting + Timidly within mine own, + And her voice to mine replying, + In a whispered undertone." + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +IN THE BLACKFOOT COUNTRY. + + +One keen, sunny afternoon in autumn, a certain Indian youth executed a +war dance among the foothills to the east of the Rocky Mountains. The +only spectator of the fantastic performance was a superb black +stallion, who, so far as can be judged, found a good deal of +entertainment in the sight. It was long before the days of kodaks and +their snapshots, which add so much to our enjoyment of everyday +incidents. + +Although Deerfoot did not waste any time, it took him a fortnight to +thread his way through that immense range which ribs the western part +of our continent. After using the last of the crimson berries that +benefited his sprain so much, he spent several hours in hunting for the +herb; but search high and low as much as he might, he not only failed +to find it, but was never able to discover the fruit in any part of the +West. + +On the morning following his first encampment in the mountain pass he +found himself strong enough, by using care, to walk upon the hurt +ankle. He was too wise to push matters too fast, which fact, added to +his perfect physical condition and the effect of the herb, carried him +swiftly along the road to recovery. At the end of a week not a trace of +lameness remained. He was cured. + +His prudence restrained him until he emerged from the mountain proper +into the foothills, when, knowing he was as strong as ever, he indulged +in the exuberant outburst. Leaving his blanket upon the back of +Whirlwind, but holding his rifle in one hand, Deerfoot leaped into the +air, spun around first on one foot and then the other, sent his shapely +legs flying seemingly in a dozen different directions at the same +moment, swung his arms, bent his body, cavorted and made contortions +that would have honored a professional acrobat. Not only that, but he +punctuated the extravagant display by a series of whoops such as had +nerved the Shawanoe warriors many a time to rush into battle. + +All this time Whirlwind stood calmly watching the performance. It is +reasonable to believe he was interested, and had he possessed the power +of laughter he would have thrown back his head and "cracked his sides" +at the sight. What a pity that George and Victor Shelton could not have +peeped out from some concealment. They would have remembered the +picture all their lives. + +Only by this grotesque exercise could the young Shawanoe find vent for +his overflowing spirits. There is nothing in all the world that can +take the place of physical vigor and health--a truth which unnumbered +thousands do not realize until too late. Temperance, right living, +obedience to the laws of hygiene, and a clear conscience, never fail to +bring their reward and to give to this life a foretaste of the blessed +one to come. + +Deerfoot had chosen an open space, walled in by rocks, boulders and +stunted undergrowth for his physical outburst. When the performance had +gone on for some time, he danced up to the side of Whirlwind and +planted one of his feet against his ribs so sharply that the stallion +was forced back for a step. Instantly he wheeled, partly reared and +struck at his insulter, but he was so afraid of hitting him that the +blow was awkward and missed the Shawanoe by a goodly distance. As he +dropped on his feet, Deerfoot darted under his belly and repeated the +blow from the other side. The white teeth of the steed snapped within a +few inches of the shoulder of the youth, who slapped the nose before it +could be withdrawn. + +Whirlwind wheeled to face his master, who landed lightly on his back +and pounded his sides with his heels. The contest recalled that other +struggle between the two, months before on the prairie, when it was a +battle royal indeed. But the great difference lay in the fact that the +present one was good-natured on both sides, and it is easy to believe +that the stallion wished the youth to prove himself once again his +master. An intelligent animal loves to obey him who has proved his +superiority. + +There is no telling all that was done by the Shawanoe. He sharply +pinched the glossy hide. He griped the nostrils of the steed as if to +shut off his breath, but was too considerate to continue this long, +since the horse seems unable to breathe through his mouth. He placed +his hand and forearm over the eyes of Whirlwind as if he meant to play +blind-man's buff with him. He yanked the forelock and reproached him as +being of no account. + +The stallion did his part in the way of defense and retaliation, but he +was continually handicapped by his dread of hurting his master. And yet +it would seem that, recalling that other conflict, he ought to have had +no such apprehension, for he had done his best on that occasion to kill +the Indian youth, who was not harmed at all, and overcame the creature +that possessed ten times his strength. + +Whirlwind showed signs of fatigue before Deerfoot did. A comparatively +clear path stretched in front. Dropping from the back of the horse, the +Shawanoe challenged him to a race. Bounding off at his highest bent, +the youth dashed across the country with the speed of the wind. He ran +as he did when on the second half of his race with Ralph Genther. + +Ah, Whirlwind had him now! No danger of hurting his audacious master, +except so far as his feelings were concerned, and the stallion did not +spare them. Despite the favorable ground, more than one boulder or +bunch of matted undergrowth had to be leaped, and the two went over +them like a couple of flying birds. But the steed steadily drew away +from the fleet Shawanoe, who at the end of two or three hundred yards, +finding himself hopelessly to the rear, gave up. + +"Deerfoot is only a child when he races with Whirlwind; have mercy on +him." + +Hearing his call, the steed ceased his running, wheeled about and +waited for his master to come up. Deerfoot patted him affectionately +and vaulted upon his back, happy as he could be over the triumph of his +matchless animal that was as well pleased as he. + +The journey through the Rocky Mountains was accompanied by many +interesting experiences which cannot be dwelt upon. It need hardly be +said that so peerless a hunter as the young Shawanoe never lacked for +food. That region is still a royal one for game, and it was such to a +more marked degree a century ago. Antelope, deer, bison and the famous +Rocky Mountain sheep were often seen, and when Deerfoot felt the need +of the food it was simple sport to obtain it. + +One day, while walking in front of Whirlwind, he came upon an enormous +grizzly bear that seemed disposed to dispute their way. The stallion +trembled with fear, but his master soothed him and prepared for a +desperate fight. Deerfoot never killed an animal in wantonness, and, +though he did not doubt that he could overcome this colossal terror, he +preferred to make a detour of the broad pass and leave him undisputed +monarch of the solitude. + +But, if the youth showed mercy to animals, he was not so considerate of +reptiles--especially when they crawled the earth. He detested a serpent +with unspeakable disgust, and believed he was doing good work in +reducing, as opportunity presented, the noxious pests. His experience +with the rattlesnake which caused his wrenched ankle did not lessen +this hatred of the species. When, therefore, a warning rattle told him +one afternoon that he had disturbed another of the venomous things +beside the path, his enmity flared up. No fear of the Shawanoe being +caught unawares, as when climbing the wall of the canyon, for he had +slain too many of the reptiles in his distant home not to understand +their nature. Whirlwind, like all of his kind, had a mortal dread of +every species of serpents, and he showed his timidity the moment the +locust-like whirring sounded from the bush at the side of the path the +two were following. + +Deerfoot caught sight of the hideous reptile, which was evidently +gliding over the earth when it detected his approach. It instantly +threw itself into coil, and with its flat triangular head upraised and +slowly oscillating back and forth, waited for the intruder to come +within reach of its deadly fangs. + +Deerfoot uttered an expression of astonishment, for it was the largest +specimen upon which he had ever looked, and he had seen many of +enormous size. He stood for a few minutes, surveying the horrible +thing, a single bite from which would have been fatal to man or animal. + +It would have been easy to clip off its head with a rifle shot from +where he stood, but he scorned to waste powder and ball upon its +species. Three stones, almost the size of his fist, did the work +effectually. When no semblance of life remained, Deerfoot approached +nigh enough to count the rattles. They were twenty-eight in number. The +time was near for serpents and bears to take to winter quarters, and +the fate of this extraordinary _crotalus_ forcibly illustrated the +truth that delays are often dangerous. + +Several times on the road, Deerfoot met those of his own race. +Sometimes they were warriors riding their ponies, and again they were +on foot. The Indian seems to be migratory by nature, and many of these +families were shifting their homes, apparently in obedience to the +yearning for change which is not confined to uncivilized people alone. +It is worthy of note that the Shawanoe not once had any trouble with +these strangers. They were hospitable and made their meaning known by +the universal sign language. Whirlwind could not fail to draw much +admiration, and Deerfoot saw more than one envious eye cast on the +stallion. It may have been due to the Shawanoe's caution and tact that +no attempt was made to rob him of his treasure. + +Winter was near, and, though only one or two flurries of snow were +encountered, the temperature often sank below the freezing point. Soon +after entering the foothills a driving storm of sleet set in which +stopped progress on the part of the Shawanoe and his horse. The youth +sought out the most sheltered nook he could find among the rocks and +kept a fire going. While he felt no discomfort himself, his companion +suffered considerably. He often slept on his feet, but now and then lay +down. Deerfoot compelled him to share his blanket, and this, with the +warmth of the blaze, did much to make the steed comfortable. It was +difficult at times for him to obtain grazing, and Deerfoot gave him +aid, as he did months before, when suffering from his lamed knee. + +Several days later the youth left the side of the stallion and climbed +to the top of a rocky elevation, which commanded an extensive view in +every direction. His eye had roved over the expanse but a few minutes +when it rested on an Indian village that lay a dozen miles to the +northeast. Adjusting the spyglass he carefully studied the collection +of tepees, which numbered about a hundred, scattered over several +acres. At the rear stretched a forest, and in front flowed a large, +winding stream that eventually found its outlet in some of the +tributaries of the Missouri. + +The question with the Shawanoe was whether or not this was the village +he was seeking. Since he had never seen it before, and since it was the +custom of all Indian tribes to locate near running water, he could not +make certain on that point from the description given by Mul-tal-la. + +The glass was an excellent one, and through its aid he could discern +the figures of people moving aimlessly hither and thither. He saw two +men enter a canoe, formed from a hollowed log, and paddle to the other +side of the stream, where they stepped out and advanced into a rocky +wood. He thought one of these warriors carried a gun and the other a +bow, but could not assure himself on that point. At the rear of the +village, in a large open space, fully a score of boys and girls were +playing with as much vigor as if they were civilized. They seemed to +have a ball that was knocked to and fro and chased by the happy +contestants, who often tumbled over one another and again were piled up +like so many foot-ball players. + +Knowing he might gaze and speculate for hours without gaining any +certain knowledge, Deerfoot was about to lower his instrument when he +observed three horsemen emerging from the settlement and riding in +Indian file toward him. He decided to go forward and meet them, for +they could give the information he was so anxious to obtain. + +Within the following hour the Shawanoe, riding Whirlwind, came face to +face with the horsemen, whom he recognized from their dress and general +appearance as Blackfeet. He saluted and addressed them in their own +tongue, causing manifest surprise. They replied to his signs and +expressions of good-will and checked their animals to hear what he had +to say. Let us interpret the conversation with more than usual freedom. + +"Do my brothers belong to the Blackfoot tribe of red men?" asked +Deerfoot. + +"We are of that tribe," replied the one who acted as leader. + +"I come from the Shawanoes, who live a long way toward the rising sun." + +"Why does the Shawanoe travel so far from the lodges of his people?" + +"I am seeking friends who are with the Blackfeet. They left many moons +ago, but parted company with me in the land of the Nez Perces. I am +trying to join them. They are two pale-faced lads who have as their +guide a good Blackfoot, Mul-tal-la, that has made the long journey to +the home of the Shawanoes." + +Upon hearing these words the latter turned his head and spoke for +several minutes to his companions, but his words were so low that +Deerfoot could not overhear them. + +"Is Mul-tal-la in the home of my brothers?" + +"No," was the response. "He does not live there." + +"Where does he live?" + +Instead of directly answering this question the Blackfoot leader said: + +"He lives in another village. What is the name of his chief?" + +"He told me it was Taggarak." + +"He is the great war chief of the Blackfeet. There is no sachem or +chief like him. His arm is powerful and has slain many Assiniboines and +Nez Perces and Shoshones." + +"The words of my brothers were told to me long ago by Mul-tal-la. I am +sure they are true. Where shall I seek Taggarak?" + +The Blackfoot pointed to the northwest. + +"Ride that way till night comes and the sun is again overhead, and he +will look upon the village of Taggarak and the home of Mul-tal-la." + +This was acceptable information, but a vague fear caused Deerfoot to +inquire further. + +"Have my brothers seen Mul-tal-la since he came home from his long +journey?" + +"No; we have heard that he has come back, but he did not bring his +comrade with him." + +"Have my brothers met the pale-faced youths who went to the village of +Taggarak?" + +"No; we have not seen them, nor have we heard of them." + +This was discomforting news, for it would seem that if tidings had come +of the return of Mul-tal-la, something also would have been said of his +companions, who belonged to another race. Deerfoot asked only a few +more questions, when he bade the Blackfeet good-bye and set out to hunt +the village of the war chief Taggarak, where, if all had gone well, he +would meet Mul-tal-la and the brothers, George and Victor Shelton. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +IN WINTER QUARTERS. + + +The time has come for us to turn our attention to George and Victor +Shelton, who, after parting with Deerfoot, set out for the principal +Blackfoot village under the guidance of their old friend Mul-tal-la, a +member of that powerful organization of the Northwest. + +You will recall that when the little party of explorers were +approaching the home of the tribe they met two warriors, who were old +friends of Mul-tal-la and lived in the same primitive settlement with +him. After Mul-tal-la had made known the sad fate of his companion in +the East, an earnest talk took place and the decision was made that it +would not only be imprudent but dangerous to the last degree for the +Blackfoot to return home, taking with him the first announcement of the +deplorable accident that had robbed the tribe of one of its best +warriors. + +Taggarak, the leading war chief, was a terrible sachem, who, on the +principle that has ruled for centuries in China, would put Mul-tal-la +to death, even though he was wholly blameless of neglect or wrongdoing. +It was agreed that our friends should push on to the westward, and then +come back to the Blackfoot settlement, where the Shawanoe and the +brothers would spend the winter, resuming their homeward journey with +the coming of spring. + +This would defer the arrival of Mul-tal-la for two or three months, +which his two friends would utilize the best they could. Taggarak would +have time for the cooling of his resentful rage, and it was to be hoped +that he would appreciate the service of Mul-tal-la, who, young as he +was, had proved himself one of the bravest of warriors. The plan was a +wise one and it worked well. + +The two messengers had a story of absorbing interest to tell. They +hinted at the remarkable experience of their comrade among his own race +and the white people, hundreds of miles toward the rising sun. They +said that when he came to the village he would bring with him a member +of the chief tribe of the East and two pale-faced youths, who would +honor the Blackfeet by accepting their hospitality for the winter. +There was something in this fact that appealed to that chivalric +feeling which is never wholly lacking in the most degraded and cruel +race. Taggarak had little to say, but the path to his magnanimity had +been paved. + +One of the chief causes of this relaxation of sternness on his part was +the accounts which he heard of the Indian youth. His fleetness of foot, +his skill with bow and rifle, his personal daring and prowess, his +quickness and strength, his comeliness of face and form, were dwelt +upon and pictured in the most glowing language. The chieftain +Taggarak's question of the messengers was characteristic, as was their +reply. + +"Are all the warriors of the Shawanoes like this youth of whom you tell +these strange stories?" + +"The Shawanoes are no braver than the Blackfeet, but there is none +among them like Deerfoot, nor can his equal be found in all the world." + +Among those who doubted the truth of the words of the messengers were +several aspiring bucks, who secretly resolved never to admit the +superiority of the Shawanoe youth in any of the respects named until +such superiority had been proved before their eyes. + +The curiosity and spirit of hospitality were general among the +Blackfeet. Expecting the visitors to spend several months with them, +they made preparations for their convenience and comfort. One of the +first things undertaken by the two who had met the little party was the +building of a tepee or home for them. Mul-tal-la had his own father and +mother and would go to their lodge, but it would not have been seemly +to place the three guests with anyone else. + +It has already been said that the Blackfoot village, which was the main +one of the tribe and the dwelling-place of the leading chief, was +stretched along the bank of a running stream which was a remote +tributary of the Missouri. This river had a rapid current and ran +almost due south in front of the village, which lay wholly on the +eastern bank. The tepees were more than a hundred in number, and, when +Taggarak went on the war path, he had taken more than two hundred +warriors from his own town--and they were the flower of the tribe. + +To the rear of the settlement was an open space covering several acres. +This was not only the children's playground, but was often used by the +warriors for their games and athletic exercises. The space was so +extensive that at certain seasons of the year the outer portions were +covered with rich nourishing grass, which was also abundant in the +neighborhood. Nearly every warrior was the owner of a horse, which, +when not in use, was allowed to wander and graze at will. + +These Indians lived after the manner of their race when removed from +civilization, which, as a rule, has proved a greater curse than boon to +them. Fortunately they knew nothing of the ruinous "fire water" that +was to await the coming of professing Christians and the claimants of a +higher culture and civilization. They spent their time mainly in +hunting and fishing, sometimes engaging in raids upon other tribes, +several of whose grounds lay to the north of the boundary line. When +not thus employed they lolled about, like true lords of creation, +smoking, drowsing or indifferently watching their squaws, who did all +the tilling of the ground and gathering of the scant crops from the +rich soil. The Blackfeet lived too far to the eastward to take any part +in the salmon fishing which gave employment to so many of their race on +the western slope of the Rocky Mountains. The warriors were finely +formed, and were held in no little respect and fear by the neighboring +red men, most of whom at some time or other had felt the weight of +their prowess. + +The home for the expected visitors was erected at the extreme northern +end of the village, and was separated by fully fifty yards from the +next neighbor to the south. About a dozen saplings were planted in the +ground so as to form a circle, perhaps fifteen feet in diameter and a +little less in height. The tops were tied together, but loosely enough +to leave an opening a foot or more across to serve as a chimney. Over +the framework thus formed were stretched with no little skill a number +of bison furs, with the furry side in. They were stitched together by +means of deer sinews and pegged at the bottom, so as to shut out all +draught. Thus all the interior walls were brown and shaggy and warm. On +the outside of numerous tepees, cured and whitened by the storms, many +of the aboriginal artists of the tribe had sketched grotesque figures +of men, horses and wild animals. + +You will note that the temporary home of our friends was of the most +primitive character, and yet all had seen such before and Deerfoot had +spent many a day and night in similar ones in the East. At one side a +loose bison robe could be lifted, thus serving as a door. When the +weather was warm this fold was often fastened back to permit a partial +ventilation of the lodge. + +In the middle of the space the fire was kindled, the smoke finding +escape through the opening in the saplings at the crown of the +structure. Despite the care with which the robes were joined together, +enough air stole through the crevices to give the necessary draught for +the chimney and furnish the occupants comparatively pure sustenance for +their lungs. + +The bare ground was the only floor to these rude structures, but the +blankets and furs served as so many rugs, and the dwellings, with the +crackling fire in the center, could be made comfortable even in the +depth of the rigorous winters. + +At that early day, more firearms than would be supposed were found +among the Indian tribes of the Northwest, though naturally the +old-fashioned bow and arrow were the main weapon. The flintlocks were +gotten by barter with tribes on the other side of the Rockies, who in +turn managed to buy them from the few ships that were beginning to +trade with the savages about the lower waters of the Columbia. These +guns were comparatively few in number, and it is hardly probable that +there were a score among the whole tribe. Few as were the firearms, +several good marksmen had been developed among the Blackfeet, and they +were naturally proud of their skill. When a party engaged in one of +their raids, all the muskets were taken with them. But ammunition was +used sparingly, for it necessitated long and expensive journeys through +the mountains to renew the supply. You remember that Mul-tal-la left +home with only his bow and arrow. + +The messengers, when spending their brief time with our friends while +they were pushing toward the Pacific, heard of that new religion which +was professed not only by Deerfoot the Shawanoe, but by his companions. +It was so different from the pagan belief that the couple, upon their +return to the village, took care to make no mention of it; better to +leave that until the arrival of Deerfoot. At the same time the two +Blackfeet trembled when they thought of what was almost certain to take +place. Taggarak was a fierce heathen who would savagely resent any +interference with the crude belief that had belonged to his people from +time immemorial. A collision between him and Deerfoot, and perhaps with +his companions, was among the certainties of the near future. + +Thus everything had been prepared for Mul-tal-la and the Shelton +brothers when one afternoon the three rode into the village, with +Zigzag the packhorse plodding at the rear of the procession. The +arrival made a hubbub of excitement, and it seemed as if the whole +settlement--men, squaws and children--gathered clamorously round the +horsemen, who dismounted and gazed about them with scarcely less +wonder. + +The parents of Mul-tal-la remained in their own lodge. They must have +been more eager than any to welcome the son that had been gone so long +out of their world, but it would have been weakness on their part to +hasten to greet him. Besides, he must needs look after the white +youths, who had now become more dependent than ever upon him. + +The two former acquaintances were among the first to crowd forward to +welcome the boys and their old companion. There was no mistake as to +the genuineness of _their_ pleasure. They told of the quarters awaiting +the lads, who, remounting with Mul-tal-la, rode to the new residence +erected at the northern extremity of the Blackfoot town, with their +guides walking beside their animals. + +Mul-tal-la was as stoical as any of his race, though he was yearning to +look upon that father and mother who would greet him, and he them, as +if they had been parted for only a few hours. Slipping to the ground +again, the three took a peep at the interior of the tepee which has +already been described to you. The boys expressed their delight and +thanked their friends over and over again. Then Mul-tal-la bade them +good-bye, promising to call in a short time, after which he lounged +away toward his own lodge. On the road he continually encountered his +old friends and exchanged greetings and talked with them as if glad of +an excuse for delaying his reunion with his parents. + +One of the first bits of news imparted to the Blackfoot was that +Taggarak was absent on a visit to the farthest village to the north, +but was expected soon to return. Mul-tal-la was relieved to hear this, +for, despite the assurances of his friends, he dreaded the anger of the +terrible chieftain. + +When within a hundred yards of his home, which remained closed as if +deserted, Mul-tal-la turned into the tepee where dwelt the parents of +the companion who had been buried hundreds of miles away. The father +sat on a pile of furs at one side of the lodge, stolidly smoking his +pipe. His squaw was kneeling in front of the burning wood and trying to +blow it into a blaze. They looked up as the visitor drew aside the flap +which served as a door. The old warrior removed the long stem from his +lips and grunted as he recognized the visitor. The squaw raised her +head, saw who the caller was, and resumed blowing the fire, as if she +had no interest in what he might say. + +Mul-tal-la told briefly the particulars of what the couple already +knew, speaking words of praise for the lost one, and saying how sad his +heart had been since the dreadful accident that befell his companion. + +The father replaced the stem in his mouth and slowly puffed. Once he +grunted, but did not speak a word. The mother continued to fill her +leathern cheeks with air and to blow upon the fagots that were burning +so strongly as not to need any urging. She did not speak nor look up +until several minutes after the departure of Mul-tal-la. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +BLACKFOOT CITIZENS. + + +"Well," said Victor Shelton, "our tramping is through for several +months to come, and we may as well settle ourselves for the winter." + +"There doesn't seem much to do in the way of settling," returned his +brother; "here we are, and here we must stay till spring comes round. I +wish it were with us now, for since we have started for the Ohio I have +become homesick." + +"We'll soon get used to this life and shall feel better when Deerfoot +joins us." + +They had removed the saddles and bridles from their horses and the pack +from the sturdy, faithful Zigzag, and brought them into their new home, +after which the animals, including Bug, the property of Mul-tal-la, had +been turned loose to browse with the others at the rear of the village. +Blankets were spread on the ground at one side of the tepee, to serve +as seats and couches, and the other conveniences, which made up most of +the burden carried thousands of miles by Zigzag, were distributed with +some taste about the interior. Their native friends had shown their +thoughtfulness by heaping a pile of dry sticks under the chimney, with +more placed within reach. The starting of the fire was left to the +lads. Nothing in the way of food was in sight, but the brothers had no +fear of being forgotten or overlooked. It was several hours before +nightfall, and they reclined on the furs to rest themselves before +going outside. A dozen or more curious men and boys were lounging near, +for the murmur of their voices reached the brothers, but no one +ventured to intrude upon their privacy. + +"George, when we get back to Ohio we shall be able to tell a story that +will beat anything Simon Kenton can relate." + +"How? There are not many that have passed through as much as he." + +"But he has never been west of the Mississippi, and it isn't likely he +ever will go. We must have gone two thousand miles beyond. When we see +him again won't we make him open his eyes with our story of a winter +among a tribe of Indians far over toward the Stony Mountains?" + +"It will be a great story, indeed; but Victor, how are we going to pass +the more than a hundred days that we must stay in this settlement?" + +"Time goes fast enough when we are on the move, either shooting rapids +in a river, riding our horses or tramping on foot, but it is mighty +dull to sit still and do nothing, and we mustn't think of any such +thing." + +"But what shall we do?" + +"What shall we do? Lots of things. We can hunt and fish, play games +with the youngsters, learn to tramp on snowshoes when winter is fairly +here, and, if Taggarak goes off on any raids, we ought to be able to +make a full man apiece." + +George looked into the face of his brother to see if he was in earnest. + +"Do you mean that, Victor?" + +"I certainly do. Why not?" + +"It is well enough to fight when you have to, but Deerfoot will never +let you do anything of that kind, nor would I agree to it. It would be +trying to kill other people just for the fun of doing so, and _that_ is +contrary to what the Shawanoe has taught us." + +"I suppose we shall have to get on as best we can with the other +amusements, but I tremble when I think of the weather that will be here +in a few weeks." + +George looked around at the brown shaggy walls of buffalo fur. He +grasped some of the long soft hairs in his palm and stroked the cool +mass. + +"We need never run short of fuel, and when the fire is going and the +door shut I don't see why we shall not be as warm as in our own home at +Woodvale. But what shall we _do_? _That's_ the question. It will be +tiresome beyond bearing to lie here stretched hour after hour during +the day." + +"Plague take it!" impatiently exclaimed Victor; "who is going to do +anything of the kind? I should like to see Deerfoot let you sleep and +lounge your days away. He will share the lodge with us, and you may be +sure he'll keep things moving. There isn't any weather cold enough nor +snow deep enough to hold him within doors, and he'll hustle you out +with him. So let's hear no more of that. Then you mustn't forget, +George, that we shall make lots of acquaintances among these people. We +have learned to speak a good many words of Blackfoot, and shall learn +more; we shall take a liking to some of these folks, and, if we have +any kind of tact, shall make them like us. Most of them have never +before looked upon a white person, but they will soon get over their +wonder, and we shall all stand on the same level." + +"Well, Victor, you have done a good deal to cheer me up. I guess it was +the homesickness, after all, that made me blue. See here, these two +fellows that put up this house for us have been such good friends that +we must be able to call them by name." + +"Mul-tal-la has repeated them several times to us." + +"Now, will you repeat either of the names to me?" + +"I couldn't do it to save my life. They are so long and outlandish that +I can never get my, tongue around them." + +"Let's give them shorter names." + +"Well, suppose you name the taller one, who has such a crooked nose." + +George reflected a moment and replied; + +"I'll call him 'Spink;' that is short and easily remembered. I don't +think he will be offended, for he seems to be good-natured." + +"We can fancy that it may mean in some language, 'He that looks Sweeter +than Honey,' and he will be delighted when we manage to make it clear +with the help of Mul-tal-la. I have the other fellow named." + +"What is it?" + +"Jiggers, or, The Warrior that showed Chief Taggarak all He Knows. +_That_ ought to make him proud and happy." + +So the two Blackfeet who had befriended the brothers received their +names, and will be hereafter thus known when we refer to them, instead +of using the difficult titles by which they were called by those of +their own race. + +From his seat opposite the door that was closed Victor had noticed a +peculiar agitation now and then of the buffalo flap. Once, when the +corner was drawn a little aside, he caught the sparkle of a bright eye, +which was instantly withdrawn, as if the owner had noticed that his +peeping was observed and he was scared. By and by the eye appeared +again, and remained longer than before. + +Victor smiled and crooked his finger at the peeping Tom. A moment later +the flap was pulled aside, so as to display the head of an urchin some +ten or twelve years old. Victor had whispered an explanation to his +brother, and both looked at the boy, who had mustered up enough courage +to step inside the tepee and then paused, as if afraid to come forward. + +This young Blackfoot had the broadest, chubbiest face the boys had ever +seen, and the grin on it seemed to touch each ear. He was short, +stocky, and the picture of good nature. He wore no cap, and his thick +black hair was cut so that it hung no lower than his chin on each side. +He wore a hunting shirt, leggings and moccasins that were not very +tidy, and he carried nothing in the nature of a weapon about him. + +Victor and George could not restrain a laugh at the chap's appearance. +The former continued to beckon to him, and said: + +"Come here, Smiler, and shake hands with your friend." + +He still hesitated, and, rising to his feet, Victor walked toward him, +speaking so soothingly that the visitor kept his place, though +apparently ready to duck his head and dash outdoors. He knew nothing +about the ceremony of shaking hands, but he allowed Victor to take his +palm in his own, and to lead him back to a seat on the furs between the +brothers. A few minutes sufficed to make him feel at ease. + +George and Victor called all their knowledge of Blackfoot into use, but +they could not think of a word that was intelligible to the youngster, +nor could they induce him to speak. He held his forefinger between his +lips, shook his head now and then, and glanced slyly from one boy to +the other, evidently well pleased but still embarrassed and a little +distrustful. + +Victor suddenly crossed over to where most of the contents of the pack +carried by Zigzag had been laid out. Among these were several gaudy +trinkets brought all the way from Woodvale and carefully reserved for +special use. From the lot he took a string of bright crimson, blue and +green beads, strung upon a linen thread, the loop being long enough to +slip over the black crown and leave the lower part resting in all its +dazzling beauty on the breast of the lad. + +You cannot imagine the wonder and delight of the dusky urchin. For a +few seconds he seemed too overcome to speak, and hardly breathed. He +looked down at the glittering string, then drew his forefinger from +between his lips and gingerly caressed the prize. Growing bolder, he +raised the loop to his mouth as if to taste it. Pressing one of the +beads with his even white teeth, the tiny glass snapped into fragments, +some of which flew several feet away. The youngster was startled and +glanced up at Victor, as if expecting a reproof. + +The lad pleasantly shook his head to signify that the present did not +form a staple article of food, and then the urchin slipped off the pile +of furs and stood upon his sturdy legs. Looking gratefully up at the +paleface he lifted the string over his head and handed the beads back +to Victor. The latter took them from his hand and immediately slipped +them about his neck again, thus showing that they belonged to the +caller. Then the little one broke into grateful laughter, ran to the +door, thrust aside the flap, and was gone. + +"You couldn't have hit upon a better name than 'Smiler,'" said George +Shelton, much amused by the peculiar visit they had received. + +"Did you ever see one with so broad a grin? My only fear is that the +other chaps will be jealous of him and expect us to give them presents, +too. We haven't enough to go a tenth of the way round; but I couldn't +refuse that codger." + +The caller had not been gone two minutes when Mul-tal-la came in, +bringing with him some buffalo meat that he had procured from a +neighbor. It was uncooked, which was a small matter to the brothers, +who were glad to see him, for he was the one person in the village with +whom they could converse freely. Carefully placing the meat on several +sticks, so as to protect it from dirt, he sat down to chat a few +minutes with his young friends. + +He told them of his visit to his father and mother, whose hearts were +made as glad as his own, after their long separation; of his call on +the father and mother of the companion whose body lay at rest many +hundreds of miles away in the East, and of the comforting assurance +that was now his that nothing was to be feared from the resentment of +Chief Taggarak. Spink and Jiggers had received within the preceding ten +days the assurance from the sachem himself, so that all uneasiness was +gone from the heart of Mul-tal-la. But, had not the counsel of the two +messengers been followed, nothing would have restrained Taggarak from +taking the life of the one that had failed to bring back his comrade. + +Victor told of the visit just received from the urchin, and of the +present made to him, much to the lad's delight. + +"We christened him 'Smiler,'" said Victor, "for I never saw such a grin +on the face of man or boy." + +"We could not help giving him the beads, but fear it will make trouble, +for all the other boys in the village will want something, and we +haven't supply for half a dozen." + +"It might have been as my brothers say," replied Mul-tal-la, "if the +boy had been the son of one of the ordinary warriors like myself, but +he is not." + +"Has he a distinguished father?" asked the wondering George. + +"He is the son of Taggarak, our great war chief." + +"I never dreamed of that," exclaimed the pleased Victor. "It surely +could not have happened better. How is it that he was braver than the +other boys and came into the lodge when all the others kept at a +distance?" + +"That," said the Blackfoot significantly, "is because he is the son of +Taggarak and _knows it_. He can do nothing that can bring him +punishment, unless it comes from his father, and he does not punish him +unless he acts as if he is afraid of something." + +"How many children has Taggarak?" + +"Only two--the one whom you saw, who bears the same name as his father, +and another boy about half as old, who is Ap-pa-pa-alk. He promises to +grow up like his father and to become one of the greatest warriors +among all the Blackfeet." + +"When the chief learns that Taggarak Junior and we have become friends, +and he sees the beads around the neck of his boy, will he not be +pleased and feel kindly toward us, who gave him the little present?" + +Mul-tal-la was thoughtful for a minute before replying. + +"The war chief is a man of strange moods. It may make no difference in +his feelings toward my brothers, but Mul-tal-la does not think he will +_hate_ them for what they have done." + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +SUMMONED TO COURT. + + +At the end of a week George and Victor Shelton had become full-fledged +Blackfoot citizens. Several causes united to bring about this pleasant +state of affairs. In the first place, the boys used tact and good +sense. If the attention they drew to themselves became annoying at +times they did not allow their new friends to see it. They played with +the dusky youths, and were not sorry to find plenty no older than they +who could outrun and outjump them. It was too cold to go in swimming, +but one day when George and Victor were crossing the stream in front of +the village with three other lads, one of whom was their young friend +Smiler, heir apparent to the Blackfoot throne, the overloaded canoe +suddenly sank below its gunwales, and all had to swim through the icy +waters to shore. Every one of the three arrived first, and Smiler beat +them all, though in this instance I cannot help suspecting that the two +young Blackfeet favored the prince, but they beat the brothers fairly. + +When the weather was good there were sometimes as many as fifty lads +playing on the common or cleared space at the rear of the village. They +indulged in a species of foot-ball, like the modern game, which was +marked by the roughest kind of play. In violence it sometimes +approached our own foot-ball, and blows were often given and received +in the fierce rushing. + +On a certain forenoon, in a particularly exciting contest, one of the +players landed a blow on the side of Victor's head, which sent him +sprawling to earth. His quick temper flashed into a flame, and he +leaped up with doubled fists and made for the offender, who coolly +awaited him. A warning cry from George recalled his brother to his +senses, and, instead of attacking his assailant, he laughingly plunged +into the melee, which went on as merrily as before. + +When five Indian youths invited their guests to go on a hunt the boys +took their rifles, but their hosts carried only bows and arrows. On the +return of the tired party at nightfall they brought the choice portions +of three antelopes, two of which were slain by the youthful Blackfeet, +while the one that George Shelton had brought down received also an +effective thrust from an arrow. The dusky hunters "guyed" the palefaces +who could not do as well as they with their primitive weapons, even +though the fire spouted from the iron tubes and the balls that could +not be seen by the eye carried death farther than did the missiles +launched by the natives. George and Victor took it all in good part, +and did not resent the taunts that were numerous. + +Another strong contributing cause to the popularity of the Shelton boys +was Mul-tal-la, He was home but a short time when everyone in the +village knew of the generous hospitality he had received from the boys +and their friends. This appeal to the gratitude of the Blackfeet +produced the best effect. Mul-tal-la and the messengers, Spink and +Jiggers, had something to add, and their stories of the remarkable +young Shawanoe roused much curiosity to see him and witness some of the +exploits of which he was said to be capable. + +Chief Taggarak did not return until nearly a week after the arrival of +the brothers, and then he kept much to himself. He was reserved and +gloomy, and though George and Victor caught several glimpses of him, +and though they continued to make much of his two boys, for the younger +moved about the settlement as freely as the elder, the great war chief +ignored the presence of the visitors until he had been at home for +several days. + +One afternoon, after the return of a party from a hunt, Mul-tal-la +appeared at the lodge of George and Victor with word that the chief +wished them to come before him for a talk. The boys knew so little of +the Blackfoot tongue that Mul-tal-la was to act as interpreter. + +"What does he wish with us?" asked George, who, like Victor, felt some +misgiving as to the object of this command. + +"Mul-tal-la does not know, but his brothers need have no fear." + +"What did he say to you?" asked Victor. + +"Only that he wished to see and talk with you. Come with me." + +It was about the middle of the afternoon when the lads, under the lead +of their dusky friend, threaded their way among the tepees to one near +the middle of the village, which might be considered the royal +residence. This structure differed from the others in that it was +double the capacity of an ordinary lodge, that one side consisted of a +broad face of rock, that it was in the shape of a square, supported at +two corners by upright poles, the rock serving as the remaining +support. The fire was always kindled against the base of this mass of +stone, an opening just above serving as an outlet for the smoke. + +When the visitors arrived Taggarak was alone, seated at one side of the +large apartment, with a small fire burning in its usual place. His +royal consort and two children were excluded from the conference. + +The war chief was about forty years of age, and his face showed him to +be a man of exceptional ability and mental strength. It was easy to +understand the iron will with which he ruled the turbulent and warlike +Blackfeet. He had thrown aside his blanket and sat in a close-fitting +shirt of deerskin, with girdle at the waist, and with leggings and +moccasins. + +Taggarak was not a handsome Indian, but he was of striking mien. His +long black hair, without ornament of any kind, dangled about his +shoulders; his mouth was broad; his nose well formed; his eyes black +and piercing, rather small, and seemed to glitter with fire from under +his eyebrows. His cheek-bones were prominent, the chin square and firm, +and the expression of the countenance stern to the last degree. +Wrinkles already showed in his low, wide forehead and at the corners of +his eyes. There were two scars on one cheek, and his arms and body, had +they been uncovered, would have revealed many more, for Taggarak was a +mighty warrior, who had beaten down many foes in single combat, and had +eagerly risked his life in resisting the desperate raids made against +his tribe, or in pushing invasions among others of his own race. Unlike +many of his own people, he never was vain enough to wear the +scalp-lock, nor did he disfigure his face with paint. When he went upon +the warpath his enemies speedily found it out, without any such +childish notices. + +Mul-tal-la led the way into the imperial wigwam, the brothers closely +following. The three respectfully saluted the chief, who looked keenly +at them as they entered, and, without returning their greeting, pointed +to a pile of furs on the farther side of the lodge, where the callers +seated themselves, removed their caps, and awaited the pleasure of the +great man. + +[Illustration: An Ominous Interview.] + +You will be better pleased with a free translation of the conversation, +remembering that Mul-tal-la acted as the mouthpiece of the chief and +the boys, though the latter had picked up enough knowledge of the +tongue to catch the meaning of a good many of the words spoken by +Taggarak, who, of course, knew nothing of English. + +"My sons have come a long way from the land of the rising sun. Why did +they leave their friends to make so long a journey?" + +"We loved Mul-tal-la, and wished to look upon the great and good +chieftain Taggarak, of whom Mul-tal-la said many words of praise." + +This reply was made by Victor, and was duly filtrated through the +interpreter, who was pleased with the words so flattering to himself. +It must be admitted that when Victor tried his hand he showed himself a +promising student of diplomacy. + +George thought it well to add his answer: + +"Hunters told us of the great land that lay toward the setting sun, and +we longed to look upon it, as Mul-tal-la and his friend longed to look +upon the country where we make our home." + +"When do my sons go back to their dwelling place?" + +"The snows will be deep in the mountains for many moons; the palefaces +will perish if they try to labor through them. They will wait till the +sun melts the snows, and the buds come on the trees and the singing of +the birds trembles in the air. They will be glad to do this if the +great Taggarak is not displeased to have them stay among his people." + +This had the sound of a hint for an invitation. Being such, however, it +failed of its purpose, for the chieftain ignored it. Perhaps he did not +think it worth the trouble to tell the youths they were welcome; that +was to be assumed from the hospitality already shown them. + +"Taggarak has heard of a wonderful warrior who came from the land of +the rising sun. Where is he?" + +"He has a horse that he loved, which was lost, and he is searching for +him." + +"There are many horses among the Blackfeet; he could have one of them." + +"But there is none like the black stallion of Deerfoot." + +"Where did the warrior get him!" + +"The stallion was the leader of a drove of wild horses. Deerfoot sought +him out and conquered him without saddle or bridle or the help of +anyone." + +This statement seemed so incredible that Mul-tal-la felt it necessary +to add his own statement that the words of the pale-faced lad were +true, for he had seen the exploit of the Shawanoe with his own eyes. +Even then it is to be feared the chieftain refused to believe the +story. + +"Are all the Shawanoes like this warrior!" + +"There is none like him," was the reply of Victor Shelton, whose full +answer was faithfully translated to Chief Taggarak. "The Shawanoes, nor +Wyandots, nor Chippewas, nor Nez Perces, nor Shoshones, nor +Assiniboines, nor any tribe are as great as the Blackfeet. Had Deerfoot +been a member of any of them, he would have been the greatest among +them all, with the exception of the mighty Taggarak, whom no one can +equal." + +Ah, but this youth from the Buckeye State was sly. He looked at the +rigid coppery countenance of the chieftain as these words were +interpreted to him. The youth thought he detected a sparkle of the +small black eyes, but I fear it was only fancy. + +"Why is he called Deerfoot?" + +"The palefaces gave him that name because no deer can run as fast as +he." + +"My sons speak with a double tongue," said the chief, frowning. + +"They might in the presence of anyone but Taggarak, but to him they use +only a single tongue. Let the great chieftain wait and see Deerfoot for +himself." + +Unquestionably Victor was advancing fast along the path of diplomacy. + +"When will the Shawanoe be with the Blackfeet, who wait to welcome +him?" + +"We hope not many suns will set before he comes; but he has had a long +way to journey, and may have to slay other warriors that are not +willing to let Deerfoot have his steed." + +"The Shawanoe may fall and never see his paleface brothers again." + +"We have no fear of that," airily replied George. The next question of +Taggarak was as startling as unexpected: + +"Does the Shawanoe teach the religion of the red men or that of the +palefaces?" + +The brothers looked significantly at each other as Mul-tal-la +translated these words, but Victor scarcely hesitated in his reply. + +"Deerfoot teaches the religion that he believes is true. It is of a +Great Spirit, who wishes his children to live in friendship with one +another; not to make war; to show mercy to all; to be forgiving and do +what they can to make other people happy. Such is the wish of the Great +Spirit. Deerfoot lives according to that faith, and we believe in it, +and try to do as he does." + +The chief looked steadily in the face of the youth while he was +speaking, though he did not understand a syllable until it was properly +rendered by Mul-tal-la. Victor gazed as unflinchingly into the fierce +countenance before him, while uttering the noble sentiments. His +self-respect forbade any shrinking on his part when such a question was +put to him. As the interpreter waited for him to finish, Victor added: + +"Tell him exactly what I said." + +"And that the answer is from both of us," added George. + +Mul-tal-la obeyed, but carefully refrained from saying that he, too, +had accepted the new religion, and that the warriors who acted as +messengers were pondering over it, and had spoken to some of their +comrades on the momentous theme. It is not for us to censure the red +man if he was cautious, for, if need be, he was ready to die for the +truth. + +The thin lips of Taggarak curled with scorn when he caught the full +meaning of the reply of the youth. His patience was gone. + +"The Shawanoe does not belong to the tribe of Taggarak. My sons, the +palefaces, are of another race; they may believe any lies they choose, +for it is naught to Taggarak. But none of Taggarak's people shall +believe it! And if the Shawanoe seeks to turn them from the faith of +their fathers, the Shawanoe shall die! My sons will tell the Shawanoe +what Taggarak has said, that when he comes among the Blackfeet he shall +live. Taggarak has spoken, and my sons may go. They will not forget the +words of Taggarak." + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +A NEW BLACKFOOT CITIZEN. + + +The words of Taggarak the war chief weighed heavily upon George and +Victor Shelton, for nothing was more certain to them than that trouble +for Deerfoot was near. He could not be frightened into any attempt to +hide his light under a bushel, or to deny the faith that was woven into +the very fibre of his being. The brothers talked the question over many +times. It was never referred to between them and Mul-tal-la, for the +Blackfoot could give them no help, and the final solution of the +problem must be reached by Deerfoot himself. + +Our young friends joined as earnestly in the games, the fishing and +hunting as ever, and no one looking upon them would have dreamed that +they suffered any discomfort of mind. Thus the days passed until two +more weeks had gone by, and they began to wonder at the long absence of +the Shawanoe. + +There had been a flurry of snow, and the weather was perceptibly +colder. As they sat in their lodge after finishing their late meal, the +sifting of the needle-like points against the bison hides was soothing +to the ear, and the crackling wood fire gave a cheerful illumination to +the interior. + +Reclining on the soft warm robes, they recurred to the theme that was +continually in their thoughts. + +"I am almost sorry we ever came to this place," said George, with a +sigh. "We have had an interesting experience, have made a number of +friends, such as they are, though there can never be much in the way of +friendship between us and these people." + +"How could we have spent the winter, which will be cold and severe?" +asked his brother. + +"Deerfoot would have had no trouble in finding some cave in the rocks +which we could have fitted up into as good a house as this. There are +places, too, where the horses would have been sheltered from the +storms, and we could gather plenty of cottonwood bark when grass was +beyond reach, and thus kept the animals alive." + +"Perhaps that might have been done, but I don't believe it is as easy +as you think. It seems to me our hope is in Deerfoot's tact. He will +not listen in silence to any attack upon his faith, and when the +heathen inquire of him he will answer them truly, but he has enough +respect for the rank of Taggarak not to offend him when there is no +need of doing so." + +"You see he has already sown seed, and there will be inquiries by +others from him. Spink and Jiggers have been thoughtful a long time. +They have spoken to others. Mul-tal-la must have done the same, though +he is cautious and fears to offend the chief. All these and many others +will question Deerfoot, who will answer them without thought or care, +even though a hundred Taggaraks stood in his way." + +"Tact is a good thing, but all that I can see it is likely to do in +this case is to postpone the trouble." + +In the midst of their gloomy talk, and with the snow still rattling +against the dry bison robes of their tepee, the flap was suddenly +lifted and Deerfoot the Shawanoe entered and caught the hand of each +delighted boy. His face was aglow with health and pleasure, for they +were no happier than he over the reunion. + +They slapped him on the shoulder, shook his hand again and again, and +plied him with so many questions that minutes passed before there was +anything like coherence in their boisterous chatter. + +"Where did you leave Whirlwind?" asked George, thereby implying that he +had not a shadow of doubt of the success of the venture of the young +Shawanoe. + +"This afternoon, when coming from the east to this settlement," replied +their friend, "Deerfoot came in sight of Mul-tal-la, who was hunting +alone. He had just shot an antelope, and we sat down and ate it +together. Then we came to the village as it was growing dark. +Mul-tal-la showed Deerfoot where the horses are free. There is snow on +the ground, but not enough to hide all the grass, and Deerfoot was told +of a place to the west, where Mul-tal-la says the shelter sometimes +permits the grass to keep green all winter. There the horses will soon +be taken, and shelter has been made for them. Whirlwind, after Deerfoot +had talked with him, consented to go among the horses, as Zigzag, +Prince and the others have done. He does not like to mingle with common +animals, and is as proud as ever." + +"We have enough left of our buffalo meat to furnish you a meal, +Deerfoot, but you told us you had eaten only a little while ago." + +"Deerfoot thanks his brothers, and will not eat until to-morrow." + +"I suppose Mul-tal-la told you all about us?" + +"He has left little for you to tell. Deerfoot is glad to hear his +brothers have been so well, but they have much to say that he would +like to hear." + +"O Deerfoot!" exclaimed Victor; "tell us how you got Whirlwind back. +You must have had a pretty hard time, for you were gone a month." + +The three seated themselves on the soft furs, George first throwing +additional wood on the blaze, and the Shawanoe, knowing how interested +his friends were, modestly related the story with which you became +familiar long ago. The boys were so absorbed in the narration that they +did not speak nor move until it was ended. He made light of the dangers +and difficulties which he overcame, and it was plain to his listeners +that he slurred over more than one of his most remarkable exploits. + +The brothers found it almost amusing to hear that the young Shawanoe +had so wrenched one of his ankles that he could not use it for a time. +It was so remarkable to learn that he had suffered from anything of +that nature that they found it hard to associate the two. The manner in +which Deerfoot stepped into the tent proved that he did not feel the +slightest effects of the hurt. The Shawanoe told his friends that he +and Mul-tal-la had purposely tarried outside the village until dark, +because the newcomer did not care to have his arrival become known +until the morrow. He wished to enjoy the first evening undisturbed with +his old friends. Being on foot, with a blanket about his shoulders like +Mul-tal-la and many other Blackfeet, he looked so much like one of them +in the night that he attracted no notice, and Mul-tal-la promised to +tell no one of the presence of the youth whom all were eager to see. + +It was not until late in the evening that the Shawanoe spoke of the +theme that had troubled the brothers so long. Mul-tal-la had told him +of the conversation with Taggarak, and he asked the boys to give their +recollection, not omitting a word they could recall. Their friend +listened gravely, and was silent when they had finished, his dark eyes +fixed upon the fire in the middle of the lodge, as if his meditations +had drifted beyond the time and place. After waiting for several +minutes, Victor said: + +"Deerfoot, you can't know how much we are worried. We understand how +you feel and that no danger can scare you into denying the true +religion, any more than it can scare George and me, but you may as well +be careful and avoid rousing the anger of Taggarak, so long as there is +no need of provoking him." + +"What would my brothers have Deerfoot do?" gently asked, the Shawanoe. + +"We don't know," replied George. "Vic and I have talked about this a +hundred times since our call on the chief, and we are puzzled as well +as worried." + +"Are my brothers ready to die for the religion?" + +"We are, and will prove it if it ever becomes necessary; but," added +Victor, "we don't see the need of dying when there isn't any need of +it." + +This original bit of philosophy caused Deerfoot to turn and look with a +half-serious expression into the face of Victor. + +"How great is the wisdom of my brother! Who taught him such things?" + +Then assuming a graver countenance, but gazing steadily at his friend, +he added: + +"There was One who died on the cross for you and Deerfoot." + +There was a world of meaning in these words, and they fitly closed the +conversation for the night. All lay down soon after and slept until +morning. + +The snow ceased falling, and only a thin coating lay on the ground at +daylight. An unusual moderation in the temperature carried this away +before nightfall, and the weather became almost spring-like, or rather +resembled the lingering days of Indian summer, which are the expiring +gasp of the mild season, soon to be followed by the biting rigors of +winter. + +Before noon it was known throughout the Blackfoot village that the +remarkable young Shawanoe had arrived. The excitement was greater than +that caused by the coming of Victor and George Shelton, and for a time +Deerfoot was seriously annoyed, but he strove to bear it with the +sensible philosophy of his nature. Those who saw him as he moved here +and there with the boys, or Mul-tal-la, or Spink and Jiggers, had to +admit the truth of the assertion heard many times; he was the most +prepossessing young warrior upon whom any of them had ever looked. +Neither among the Blackfeet nor any of their neighboring tribes had so +comely a youth been seen. And this being the fact, many were more +unwilling than before to believe he was so powerful, so active, so +fleet of foot and so athletic as had been claimed. This doubt was not +lessened by the conduct of Deerfoot himself. He soon became acquainted +with nearly everyone in the village, and went upon hunting expeditions +with them, but displayed no more skill than most of his companions. He +avoided all trials of speed, though often invited to take part by the +doubters. In crossing the river in a canoe with two of his new +acquaintances, he swung a paddle, while each of them did the same. The +Blackfeet saw no evidence of skill superior to theirs, because in truth +none was displayed. He was urged to take part in their games, but made +excuse to act only as spectator. He did not wish to become a competitor +and deceive the others by not doing his best. His modesty led him to +shrink from exhibiting his abilities. Moreover, he had a feeling that +it savored of ingratitude or lack of appreciation of the hospitality he +was receiving to place himself at the fore, as he knew he could readily +do. + +But it had to come. Too many boasts had been made by the friends of +Deerfoot for the envious Blackfeet to allow the Shawanoe to rest upon +such laurels. Neither Mul-tal-la nor the brothers would abate one bit +of their claims. Deerfoot would have stopped them had not the mischief, +as he viewed it, been done before his coming. He could only remain mute +and hope the matter would die out of itself. But that was impossible. + +The most noted test of athletic skill that ever occurred in the history +of the Blackfeet tribe took place one bright, keen, sunshiny afternoon +on the bleak plain at the rear of the village. A week had been spent in +making the preparations as thorough as they could be made. Runners came +from three of the other villages, and they were the flower of the +tribe--lithe, sinewy, swift and splendid specimens of manly beauty, +symmetry and grace. Each was worthy of being called a champion, and all +were confident of lowering the colors of the dusky stranger from the +land of the rising sun, who had been presumptuous enough to be +persuaded to enter a trial that must disgrace him. More than one +believed that in his chagrin the Shawanoe would hasten from the village +and never more be seen in that part of the world. + +Now, it would be interesting to tell all about this memorable +tournament, but you have no more doubt of the result than did the +victor from the moment he consented to enter into it. Mul-tal-la and +the Shelton brothers, including Spink and Jiggers, impressed upon the +Shawanoe the necessity of his doing his best, no matter what the nature +of the struggle might be. He promised to follow their counsel, as he +did that of Simon Kenton at the foot race at Woodvale the year before. + +Five contestants entered against Deerfoot. The distance was about two +hundred yards. Never before was the Shawanoe pitted against such fleet +runners, but he finished the struggle fifty feet in front of the +foremost. The spectators, as well as the defeated runners themselves, +were dazed, and could hardly credit their own senses. + +Not less crushing were Deerfoot's victories in the running, the +standing and the high jump. Like all great athletes, his triumphs +seemed to be won without calling upon his reserve capacity, and +therefore with much less apparent effort than shown by his rivals. In +firing at a target, he left the few marksmen of the tribe hopelessly +out of sight. Then he borrowed Mul-tal-la's bow, and every arrow that +he launched went farther and truer than any other. Altogether it was a +great day for Deerfoot the Shawanoe. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +THE SPIRIT CIRCLE. + + +Never in all their lives were the Shelton brothers prouder of Deerfoot +the Shawanoe than when they saw him utterly defeat the finest athletes +of the Blackfoot tribe. The youth had done his best, as he was urged to +do, and his triumph was too overwhelming for anyone to question it. He +had been pitted against the very flower of that powerful people, who at +that time numbered between three and four thousand souls. The pick of +the runners and marksmen had come from the other villages, and every +one was decisively vanquished. + +The delight of Mul-tal-la and of Spink and Jiggers was hardly less than +that of the boys. Mul-tal-la _knew_ the Shawanoe would win, while the +other two Blackfeet merely believed it, for they had never been +intimately associated with the champion of champions, and only +remembered what Mul-tal-la told them he had witnessed. + +Human nature is the same the world over, and among the defeated ones +was a feeling of envy and resentment toward the young warrior who +belonged to another tribe, and who, after coming many hundreds of +miles, had put them all to shame. This was to be expected, and it +caused no uneasiness to Deerfoot, who had faced it many times among his +own race as well as on the part of white people. + +But the Shawanoe took little or no pleasure in his victory. He had +entered into the contest because he could not help it. Had he reached +the village at the same time with his friends, he would have sternly +forbidden any reference to his brilliant physical powers, and thus +prevented the tournament that was so distasteful to him; but, as I have +shown, the mischief was done before he came upon the scene. His +reputation had been proclaimed, and naught remained but to prove that +only the simple truth had been told of him. + +That evening the four friends who had spent so many days and nights +together were gathered in the lodge at the northern end of the village. +Time had been given for the excitement to die out. Three of the +defeated champions were well on their way to their own village, when, +had the result been different, they would have staid for several days +in what may be considered the Blackfoot capital. The hum and murmur of +voices and the restless moving to and fro were audible outside, but the +old companions were left to themselves. Mul-tal-la had succeeded in +impressing upon his countrymen that when their guests retired to their +tepee they were not to be intruded upon. + +The fire was burning in the middle of the primitive home, and George +and Victor Shelton and Mul-tal-la were seated on the furs that were +spread along three sides of the apartment. Deerfoot sat by himself, +removed from all. He was partly reclining on one elbow and gazing into +the fire, as if sunk in meditation. The boys knew the meaning of his +attitude and air; he was dissatisfied with what had occurred that day. + +"By gracious!" said Victor; "if I could do what you did, Deerfoot, I'd +be so proud I wouldn't speak to George or Mul-tal-la or you; and yet +you don't seem to feel a bit stuck up. You ought to be ashamed of +yourself." + +The Shawanoe made no reply, but continued gazing into the fire, as if +he did not hear the words. George added: + +"Your victory will be talked about among all the Blackfoot villages, +and the children of to-day will tell their children about it long after +we are gone." + +Mul-tal-la kept glancing at Deerfoot with an admiring, affectionate +expression, and, noting his continued silence, he said in a gentle +voice: + +"The Blackfeet did not think Mul-tal-la spoke with a single tongue; +they said his words were lies, but they do not say so now." + +"I didn't see anything of Taggarak," added Victor. "I looked around for +him after the battle was won. Why did he stay away?" + +Deerfoot for the first time noted what was said. He lifted his head +from his elbow and sat upright. + +"Taggarak was there; Deerfoot saw him," he quietly remarked. + +"Yes; Mul-tal-la passed near him. The chief kept by himself and spoke +to no one. He was on the side nearest the wood. Just before the last +race was won he turned away and went back to his lodge." + +"What was the meaning of _that_?" asked the Shawanoe. "Is he displeased +with the defeat of his young men?" + +"It is the other way; he is glad their conceit has been checked. The +Blackfeet are great boasters, and he has reproved them many times. +Mul-tal-la saw him smile when Deerfoot came home many paces in front of +that tall warrior, who is the greatest boaster of them all. Taggarak +was glad when he was defeated." + +"It pleases us more than we can tell to know that Deerfoot has won the +good-will of the war chief," observed George Shelton, who could not +forget that ominous conversation they had had some time before with +Taggarak. "It will make our stay more pleasant than I believed it would +be." + +The observant Victor noticed that Mul-tal-la gave no reply to this +remark, which had been made in the hope of being confirmed by the +Blackfoot. The latter glanced at the Shawanoe, whose eyes again rested +upon the fire. George threw a couple of sticks in the blaze and then +resumed his seat beside his brother. When the stillness was becoming +oppressive, Mul-tal-la startled all three of his listeners by what was +certainly a remarkable question: + +"Is Deerfoot afraid of any man?" + +Even the Shawanoe flashed a surprised look upon the Blackfoot. + +"Why does my brother ask Deerfoot that?" + +"He shall soon know. Will Deerfoot answer Mul-tal-la?" + +The question seemed to rouse the Shawanoe, who spoke with more +animation than he had shown since the group had come together for the +evening. + +"No; Deerfoot fears no man that lives! God has given him more power and +skill than he deserves. He has never denied protection to Deerfoot. He +has told him to do right, and Deerfoot tries to obey His will. When He +thinks the time has come for Deerfoot to go to Him, Deerfoot will be +ready and will be glad. Deerfoot knows He is not pleased with such +things as took place to-day. What is it for one man to run faster or +shoot straighter than another? No credit belongs to _him_, for it is +God who gives him the power. Deerfoot would sin if he shrank from any +task laid upon him; but a victory like that just won does no one any +good. Deerfoot would be happier if he could turn the thoughts of all +those people to the true God." + +In the warmth of his feelings the Shawanoe had wandered from the +question just asked him, but in doing so he revealed the nobility of +his nature. He was oppressed by the belief that the strife in which he +had been the victor not only accomplished no real good, but actually +retarded the work he had in mind. He came back to the question his +friend had just asked. + +"Why does my brother think Deerfoot is afraid of any man?" + +Mul-tal-la could not hide a certain nervousness, but with all the +calmness he could summon he parried the direct question by the remark: + +"The most terrible warrior of all the Blackfeet is Taggarak the +chieftain; he has slain many men in battle and has never been +conquered." + +The inference from this remark was obvious even to the boys. It was +Victor who asked in surprise: + +"Is Deerfoot to fight with Taggarak? If he does, I'll bet on Deerfoot." + +To any others except those present the words of the Shawanoe would have +sounded like boasting, but there was no such thought in his heart. + +"Deerfoot has no more fear of Taggarak than he has of a pappoose. He +may be a great warrior, but Deerfoot has conquered as great warriors as +he." + +Determined that Mul-tal-la should parry no longer, the Shawanoe forced +him to a direct answer. + +"Why does my brother think Taggarak wishes to fight him?" + +The reply was astonishing: + +"The squaw of Taggarak is seeking to learn of the God that she has been +told is known to the Shawanoe. She has asked me, she has asked +Kepkapkolakak and Borabtrik (the messengers known as 'Spink' and +'Jiggers'). She does not sleep because of her heaviness of mind." + +"Does Taggarak know of this?" asked the surprised Deerfoot. + +"Not yet; but it must soon come to his knowledge." + +"Will he harm his wife?" + +"Mul-tal-la cannot say; he may put her to death. There is no doubt that +he will slay Deerfoot--_if he can_," added the Blackfoot significantly, +"or he will make him walk around the Spirit Circle till he drops dead." + +Deerfoot stared in astonishment. He was mystified. + +"The Spirit Circle," he repeated. "Does Deerfoot hear aright? If so, +what does his brother mean? Deerfoot is listening." + +Thus appealed to, the Blackfoot was silent for a minute, as if +gathering his thoughts. He looked up at the opening in the roof of the +lodge, then into the fire, and, addressing the three, repeated the +following myth or legend, which has been extant among the Blackfeet +Indians from time immemorial: + +"Many, many moons ago, long before the parents of our oldest men were +born, a chieftain as great as Taggarak ruled the Blackfeet. His fame +reached far to the north, to the east, to the south and to the west, +beyond the Stony Mountains, to the shore of the great water, for there +was none like him. In those far-away days the home of Wahla, chieftain +of the Blackfeet, was to the south of this village, on the banks of the +Two Rivers. + +"Wahla had a daughter who was the most beauteous maiden that warrior +ever looked upon. She was loving and dainty, and the idol of the stern +old warrior, who would have cut off his right hand rather than have the +slightest harm come to her. Never did father love daughter more than +Chief Wahla loved Mita the Rose of the Forest. + +"Wahla returned one day from a fierce battle with the Cheyennes. A +great victory had been won, and the Blackfeet brought home a score of +prisoners, that they might be tied to the stake and burned while their +captives made merry over their sufferings. This was the custom of the +Blackfeet, and they have not yet forgotten such amusements. + +"Among the captives was a manly youth, who was proud and brave, and had +slain three of the Blackfeet and wounded Wahla himself before they made +him prisoner. He scorned to ask mercy, which would have been denied +him, and, without a tremor of limb or a dimming of his bright eyes, +awaited the cruel death that he knew had been prepared for him and his +comrades. + +"Wahla had to keep his captives for a week or more until word could be +sent to the other villages, that they might come and feast upon the +deaths of the Cheyennes. During that time, Mul-tal-la cannot tell how, +the young Cheyenne warrior and Mita, daughter of the chieftain, met and +learned to love each other. No one knew their secret, and so, while +preparations were going on for the cruel deaths, she managed to loose +his bonds, and one night the two fled for the home of the Cheyennes, +there to become husband and wife. + +"Wahla did not learn of the flight of his daughter and lover until the +next morning, when he started in pursuit. He went alone, for his rage +was so terrible that he was not willing anyone should share the +sweetness of revenge with him. He traveled fast, and drew nigh enough +to catch sight of the two on the second day following their flight. He +did not carry his bow, but had his knife and tomahawk, while the youth +possessed no weapon at all. Had a knife been his, he would not have +used it against Wahla, because he was the father of the maiden whom he +loved more than his life. + +"When the two found they could not flee faster than the wrathful +chieftain, they paused and waited for him to come up. Then Mita threw +herself at the feet of her father and prayed him to spare the life of +the Cheyenne. The chief spurned her and ran after the young warrior. +The youth did not flee, but stood with folded arms, calmly awaiting +him. + +"'Slay me,' he said, 'but when I die Mita will die with me!' + +"Heedless of the appeal, the furious chieftain plunged his knife into +the breast of the youth, who sank to the earth and breathed out his +life. Wahla turned to seize his daughter, but at that moment a wild +shriek rent the air, and she died, clasping his knees and moaning that +he had slain her as well as the Cheyenne. + +"When Wahla saw what he had done, he started to hurry to his village, +but his mind had gone from him. You were told that he had been wounded +by the Cheyenne in battle. The wound was in the thigh of the chief, and +it now broke out afresh, as if in punishment for the crime he had +committed. It made him limp sorely, but he would not stop, and ran +faster than ever. Because of his halt gait, he ran in a circle. + +"Round and round he went all night, when he perished, but the Great +Spirit kept him running throughout the days and weeks that followed +until he became a shadow. His feet wore a circular path, which may be +seen to-day, as Mul-tal-la has looked upon it many times and my +brothers may do if they will journey a few days to the southward. + +"But Mul-tal-la now tells the strangest part of this story. In the +years that have passed since Wahla slew the Cheyenne lover, and his +daughter died at his feet, the storms would have wiped away all signs +of the path long ago. But it remains as distinct as ever. This is +because the spirit of Wahla tramps it round and round all through the +nights when the moon does not shine, for no one can see him running +over the ground. + +"When you look toward the slope of the mountain you can see the circle +as plain as we see those sticks burning in the middle of the lodge, but +when you reach the spot no sign of the path shows." + +"How is that?" asked the wondering Victor. + +"It is the belief that the spirit of Mita, the daughter, is always +hovering over the spot, and that her heart forever grieves for her +father and lover. When she sees anyone drawing near the place, she +hurries from her home, which is near at hand, though no one knows +exactly where, and, bending over the ground, hurries along and flirts a +piece of her garment over the whole length of the path and blots it +out, so that grass grows where a few minutes before was only the hard +earth, packed by the moccasins of her father." + +"What brings the path into sight again?" asked George Shelton. + +"When night comes, Chief Wahla begins tramping around the circle once +more. At sunrise the path is as it was before, and so remains unless +some one starts forward to gain a closer look. The moment he does so +the invisible spirit of Mita, daughter of Wahla, hurries out and +destroys all the footprints, so that no one has ever been near enough +to gain a close view of them, nor can he ever do so. Such is the legend +of the Spirit Circle."[1] + + [1] On the gently sloping side of a low mountain near the + Colorado-Wyoming line can be plainly seen a circular path of + about two hundred feet in diameter. The road connecting the + Rambler copper mines with Laramie passes within ten miles of the + place. When the curious observer climbs to the spot, whose path + shows distinctly from a distance, he cannot detect a sign of the + mystic circle. Various theories have been offered in explanation + of this phenomenon, but as yet none has proved satisfactory. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +THE FIELD OF HONOR. + + +Deerfoot did not interrupt the Blackfoot while he was relating the +legend of the Spirit Circle. He listened attentively. He had heard many +such myths among his own people, and once they impressed him, but he +had come to look upon them as idle tales not worth a thought. Instead +of commenting upon the rude beauty of the story that had been told to +his friend many years before, he asked the practical question: + +"What has the Spirit Circle to do with Deerfoot and Taggarak?" + +"It is the law among the Blackfeet that when our war chief Taggarak +wills to punish some great criminal he sends him to the Spirit Circle, +where he must walk around it without food or drink till he drops down +and dies." + +"Has anyone ever done that?" asked the Shawanoe. + +"Yes; more than once. Not many moons ago a warrior killed his father, +mother and child in a fit of rage. The only punishment that fitted such +an awful crime was that of the Spirit Circle. Three warriors took the +man there and started him round the path; they took turns in watching, +and made sure that he had no food nor water, and was kept moving till +he could move no longer. He fell down, and they stood near until he +breathed his last; then they came back to Taggarak and told him what +had been done." + +"My brother has not yet shown what his words have to do with Deerfoot +and Taggarak." + +"Let my brother have patience and he shall know. Deerfoot remembers the +rock from whose top he first caught sight of Mul-tal-la, whose brother +was coming to this village, riding on Whirlwind?" + +As he spoke the Blackfoot pointed to the east. Deerfoot nodded. The +meeting place was a half mile beyond the open space on which the +athletic contests had been held that day. + +"It is the command of Taggarak that the Shawanoe shall meet him there +to-morrow, when the sun climbs the mountain tops. He must bring only +his hunting knife and come alone; the chief will do the same. When they +face each other, Taggarak will give the Shawanoe the choice of dying by +his hand or at the Spirit Circle." + +"Did Taggarak say _that_ to my brother?" + +"That is his command. He has heard that the Shawanoe is making squaws +of his warriors; he therefore gives him his choice of deaths." + +Victor Shelton sprang to his feet. + +"See here, Mul-tal-la," he said, excitedly; "do you tell us that the +chief Taggarak makes the condition that he and Deerfoot are each to use +only his knife as a weapon?" + +The Blackfoot gravely nodded his head. + +"And that neither is to have a friend with him?" + +"So Taggarak wills." + +"That isn't the way people fight duels. George and I must be on hand +when Deerfoot gets into a scrape like that." + +"But it cannot be." + +"My brothers will stay here till Deerfoot comes back to them," quietly +remarked the Shawanoe. + +"But how are we to know that Taggarak won't play some trick on us? He +may have half a dozen of his warriors hiding among the bushes or rocks, +so as to help him kill Deerfoot." + +For the first time in the interview Mul-tal-la smiled. + +"Taggarak never breaks his word. He might do as my brothers say if he +thought there was need of it. He doesn't believe the Shawanoe will be +more than a child in his hands when the two stand in front of each +other." + +"He might have thought that yesterday, or at any time before the games +to-day, but after he saw Deerfoot perform he must have some doubt." + +"Deerfoot did not fight. Taggarak knows naught of his skill in doing +that, even though he has been told he killed a grizzly bear in a fair +struggle. He would feel ashamed if he asked for any help against the +Shawanoe." + +Deerfoot calmly rose to his feet. Those who looked up at him noted a +peculiar flash of his dark eyes that was not often seen, and, when +seen, told of the hidden fires he was holding in subjection. He raised +his hand for silence. + +"Let Deerfoot speak. He knows where the rock is that Taggarak says +shall be the meeting place between him and me. His command shall be +obeyed. Deerfoot will be there, with only his knife to defend himself. +He has said he does not fear the Blackfoot chieftain. Let my brothers +speak of something else." + +The boys and even Mul-tal-la were so full of the theme that it was hard +for them to talk or think of anything beside. They would have +questioned the Shawanoe as to his plans and intentions, but he would +not permit. The hour was growing late, and the Blackfoot remained but a +short time, when he bade all good-night and passed out of the tepee. + +Respecting the mood of Deerfoot, neither Victor nor George made any +further reference to the momentous morrow. They disrobed and stretched +out on their soft couches, while the Shawanoe, taking his Bible from +the bosom of his hunting shirt, reclined on one elbow--his favorite +attitude at such times--so that the light fell on the printed page. He +read in his low, musical voice until, suspecting the truth, he paused +and looked across at the brothers. Both were asleep. He smiled, read +awhile longer to himself and then joined them in the land of dreams, +sinking into slumber as quickly as they, and within the ten minutes +following his own prayer. + +The morning dawned dull, chilly and clouded, with threats of snow in +the air. The Shawanoe was the first to awake, and busied himself in his +usual noiseless fashion with renewing the fire and preparing the +morning meal from the antelope meat, of which enough was on hand to +last for several meals. The salt and pepper brought by the boys from +home had been used up long before, and they had accustomed themselves +to get on without the condiments which seem so much of a necessity with +us. + +The breakfast was eaten with the usual deliberation, none of the three +speaking of the event that was impending, though the brothers were full +of it. When Deerfoot arose, drew his knife from his girdle, carefully +inspected it and then shoved it back in place and glanced across the +room to where his rifle was leaning in one corner, Victor could keep +silence no longer. + +"You know what faith we have in you, Deerfoot, but we are anxious, and +shall be in distress until we see you back again." + +"Why are my brothers troubled?" calmly asked the Shawanoe. + +"We can't help believing Taggarak will use treachery, for he must know +he isn't certain to win when he attacks you." + +"Nothing can make him believe the truth till it comes to him. He will +take no warriors with him. Deerfoot is in no danger. Let my brothers +smile and be glad." + +"I wish I could grin, but it's too hard work," was the doleful response +of Victor, the face of his brother showing that he felt the same. + +Deerfoot warmly shook hands with each in turn, such being his usual +custom, stooped and drew the flap aside and passed from sight. Enough +of the Blackfeet were astir to notice him moving at a moderate pace +past the lodges toward the clearing at the rear of the village. He +greeted all in their own language, and did not show by anything in his +manner that he had any important matter in hand. He stealthily glanced +here and there, on the lookout for Taggarak, but saw nothing of him. +Perhaps the chief had already gone to the scene of the hostile meeting; +perhaps he had not yet set out, for the hour was early, or, what was +more likely, he had taken another route. Of one thing Deerfoot was +certain: the chief had told no one of what was coming, except +Mul-tal-la, who bore the message to the youth. When the two combatants +should meet, no human eye must witness the terrific combat. + +The sagacious Shawanoe had decided to follow a certain line that may +impress you as singular for him to adopt. It seemed like undue +confidence when he declared that he had no fear of the man who was +certainly the most fearful fighter of the whole Blackfoot tribe. Modest +as he was by nature, Deerfoot was too intelligent not to understand his +decisive superiority, as compared with any of his own or of the white +race. That superiority had been proved too often to leave any doubt in +his mind. Moreover, with his youth and high health, he was aware that +these remarkable powers were not declining, but rather increasing, and +ought to increase for a dozen or more years to come. + +The American Indian, as a rule, does not show excessive muscular +development. Arms and legs are wanting in those ridged bunches of sinew +which often bulge out all over our athletes. And yet more than one red +man has displayed prodigious strength. Deerfoot believed he was +stronger than Taggarak, despite his own light, graceful figure, which +made him a dusky Adonis. + +He knew that possibly he was mistaken in this respect, but there could +be no doubt on another point: he was much quicker of movement than the +iron-limbed Taggarak. The open space would give full freedom to both, +and this quickness would not be hampered at all during the fight +between them. Moreover, Deerfoot was an unerring judge of distance, and +knew on the instant when to dodge and when to strike. Therefore he +feared not, but with that old Adamic strain in his nature, really +yearned for the battle. + +It has long been the custom of Indians, when facing each other in +mortal strife, to resort to taunts and insults. If a foe can be driven +into anger, while his tormentor keeps cool, the latter has the victory +half won. Deerfoot could not stifle a feeling of resentment over the +contemptuous behavior of Taggarak toward him. Instead of contenting +himself with merely challenging the Shawanoe to mortal combat, he sent +him word that all that was left for him to do was to choose between two +methods of shuffling off the mortal coil. It was to be the Spirit +Circle or by the knife of the Blackfoot. This scornful treatment of the +youth angered him, and it was one of the reasons why he decided to +adopt a policy which in other circumstances he would have considered +beneath a true warrior. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +A MEMORABLE DUEL. + + +Deerfoot the Shawanoe, before entering the elevated wooded portion to +the east of the bleak plain that had been the scene of his triumphs the +day before, paused and carefully scrutinized all that lay within his +field of vision. He was not altogether free from a shadowy suspicion +that Taggarak would resort to treachery, though for reasons named by +Mul-tal-la it was improbable. Despite the care the youth had used, he +feared that rumors of the coming fight had got abroad, and some of the +curious might brave the wrath of their chief for the sake of viewing +the combat. That which Deerfoot saw, or rather failed to see, convinced +him that both fears were unfounded. + +He recalled too clearly the spot named by the Blackfoot to make any +mistake, and he went directly to it. A few rods beyond the rocks where +Mul-tal-la and Deerfoot had caught sight of each other after their long +separation was a comparatively clear and level space that covered a +fourth of an acre or less. A glance showed it to be an ideal spot for a +meeting such as was at hand. + +Deerfoot looked hastily around for Taggarak. He was not in sight. In +truth, the Shawanoe was considerably ahead of time, and the chief was +not a moment late when, after awhile, he strode into view from the +other side of the arena. + +This famous chieftain has already been described. No one could look +upon him without a certain admiration, and it was easy to believe the +many stories of his prowess. He was spare of frame, nearly six feet +tall, and his mien and manner showed perfect fearlessness. He wore no +head dress, his abundant hair, in which there was not the first +streaking of gray, falling loosely over his shoulders, almost to his +waist. The upper part of his body was encased in a shirt of deerskin, +and the buckskin breeches were fringed down the legs. Deerfoot noticed +that he had on a new pair of moccasins, stained several bright colors. +He must have thought the occasion warranted something in the nature of +display. There was no skirt to the jacket-like garment, the thighs +being inclosed with the buckskin which formed the leggings, after the +manner of the modern style of trousers. The handle of his knife--the +weapon that many a time had done frightful work--could be seen +protruding from the girdle that encircled his waist. + +With a dignified step the chief strode forward until within a dozen +paces of Deerfoot, when he paused and scowled at him. + +Following his policy of tantalism, Deerfoot made a mock bow and said: + +"Blackfoot, the Shawanoe is glad to see you come at last. But why does +the Blackfoot tremble when he finds himself in front of a warrior +instead of a squaw who knows not how to fight?" + +The chief had never been addressed in this audacious fashion, and his +eyes seemed to scintillate from under his scowling brows. Could it be +he heard aright? + +"When the Shawanoe learned that the Blackfoot who calls himself chief +and pretends to be a brave man wished to meet him in fight by this +rock, the heart of the Shawanoe was glad and he hurried to come; but +the Blackfoot is backward. He hoped the Shawanoe would not come, but he +is here and eager to fight him." + +And to show the truth of his words, Deerfoot drew his knife from his +girdle and grasped it in his good left hand. + +Taggarak now found his voice. There was a tremulousness in the words, +but it was due to his tumultuous wrath and not to fear. + +"Dog of a Shawanoe! Do you choose to die by the hand of Taggarak, or +shall he send you to the Spirit Circle? Let him choose!" + +"Squaw of a Blackfoot! It shall be _neither_. The Shawanoe cares naught +for the Spirit Circle, and will not go there. He has no fear of the +Blackfoot who knows how to fight women but trembles when he stands +before the Shawanoe! Has the Blackfoot brought some of his warriors to +save him from the anger of the Shawanoe?" + +And Deerfoot glanced around, as if looking for the help which he knew +was not near. He did not see it, but he saw something else, which +caused him almost as much displeasure. As he turned toward a large +boulder, half hidden by bushes, the upper part of a head dropped down +out of sight. Seen only for an instant, the Shawanoe recognized the +owner as Victor Shelton, and knew his brother was with him. Despite +Deerfoot's orders the boys had managed to steal their way from place to +place and were spectators of this meeting. It was too late now to +correct the wrong, and he acted as if he knew it not. All the same, he +resolved to "discipline" the youths for disregarding his orders. + +[Illustration: A Memorable Duel.] + +In this game of abuse the chief was no match for the Shawanoe, who saw +that the tempestuous rage of Taggarak threatened to master him. +Accustomed throughout his life to be feared and obeyed, it was +unbearable thus to be flouted to his face by a stripling, whom he felt +able to crush like a bird's egg. He drew his knife, whose blade was +several inches longer than the weapon of the Shawanoe. + +With the weapon clinched as if in a vise, the chief thrust his left +foot forward for a single pace, but did not advance farther. He was +debating with himself how best to dispose of this intolerable youth. A +quick death would be too merciful; he would first wound and then +prolong his suffering for an hour or more. + +"The trembling Blackfoot fears to come to the Shawanoe, so the Shawanoe +will go to him." + +These words were accompanied with an exquisite sneer, and Deerfoot +advanced three paces, taking care to stop before he was within reach of +the enraged chief. + +"Does the Shawanoe think the God he worships can save him from the +vengeance of Taggarak, who spurns that God?" + +The reply was a noble one. Dropping his insulting tones and manner, +Deerfoot said: + +"The Shawanoe knows not whether the God he worships will save him; he +never cares nor thinks of _that_. He knows that whatever his Father +chooses to do _is right_, and if He does not wish to take care of the +Shawanoe, it _is right_. He will go to heaven, the abode of those who +obey God, when he is called. He will be ready, whether he hears that +call in the gloom of the woods at midnight or on the plain when the sun +is high in the sky. + +"The Blackfoot worships false gods. Let him learn whether they will +help him when he stands in front of the Shawanoe." + +The self-confidence of the chief was absolute. Wearied of listening to +the taunts of the dusky Apollo, he strode toward him, raising his right +hand as he did so, feinted once and then brought down the weapon with a +vicious vigor that was meant to bury the point in the shoulder of +Deerfoot. + +The blade, however, swished through air, and the youth smote the chief +squarely in the mouth with the back of his fist. He could have used his +knife, but he chose to play awhile with this boaster. He delivered his +blow so quickly that the Blackfoot, accustomed as he was to fierce +hand-to-hand fighting, had no time to dodge or parry, and the next +instant the Shawanoe was ten feet away, weapon still grasped, and +grinning at the slightly dazed chief. + +"Why does not the Blackfoot squaw strike the Shawanoe? The Shawanoe has +struck _him_. Cannot the Blackfoot see where to strike with his knife? +He is as slow as an aged woman, but he fears the Shawanoe, who is his +master." + +Taggarak could not believe his failure was anything more than one of +those accidents to which the most skilful fighter is sometimes liable. +His weapon was still firm in his hand, and he moved forward again, +taking shorter and more stealthy steps. He crouched as if gathering his +muscles for a leap, while the Shawanoe contemptuously watched him, +alert and observant as a cat. + +Six feet away the chief halted. Deerfoot did not stir. Taggarak had +learned of the lightning-like quickness of the youth, but felt none the +less certain of speedily overcoming him. + +For a full minute the two glared at each other, neither speaking, but +the same aggravating, scornful smile was on the face of the young +Shawanoe. Suddenly he did an astounding thing. He tossed his knife +several feet up in the air, caught it by the handle as it came down and +then flung it a couple of rods to one side. + +"The Shawanoe needs no weapon to conquer the Blackfoot squaw!" + +Then Deerfoot voluntarily placed himself in front of the furious +warrior, without any weapon with which to defend himself. Not only +that, he folded his arms over his breast and with biting irony added: + +"Now let the Blackfoot think he has a squaw in front of him; then he +will strike hard, if his hand does not tremble." + +It was more than flesh and blood could stand. The passion within the +breast of the chief broke into a volcano-like flame. With a hissing +gasp he sprang forward, striking swiftly with his knife, first +downward, then upward and then from side to side, as if he meant to cut +the execrated youth into ribbons. He repeated the wild blows with a +celerity that almost prevented the eye from following the movements. + +But, as before, he split only vacancy. Deerfoot easily eluded the +strokes, which were blinder than usual, for Taggarak was beside himself +with passion. In the midst of his aimless outburst the Shawanoe did +another thing which was worthy of a skilled pugilist. Waiting for an +opening, he shot his left hand forward, and, with the open palm, landed +a stunning blow on the bridge of the chief's nose. The advantage of +such a blow is that, when rightly delivered, tears are forced into the +eyes of the one receiving it, who, for a minute or two, is partially +blinded. You can understand his fatal position. He cannot pause to +clear his vision, for it comes at the crisis of the fight, and an +instant halting means ignominious defeat, while to persevere, when he +has only the partial use of his sight, makes his disadvantage hardly +the less. + +While the chief was savagely blinking, in order to enable him to see, +the crowning taunt of all sounded in his ears: + +"The Blackfoot cries like a pappoose. Does he wish to tread the Spirit +Circle? Does he beg the Shawanoe to be merciful to him? If he whines +for pity, let him sink on his knees and the Shawanoe will listen to his +crying." + +Chief Taggarak now lost the last shred of self-control. With a growl of +crazy rage he bounded forward again, striking up and down and right and +left with a blind, venomous energy that would have exhausted a giant. + +Suddenly the wrist which held the whistling blade was seized in the +steel-like fingers of Deerfoot's left hand. The grip was fearful, for +the Shawanoe had now called upon his last reserve of strength, and the +wrist was as if encased in a coil of iron. Then, with a peculiar twist +of his hand, known only to himself, and resembling that remarkable +system known under the name of jiu jitsu among the Japanese, who are +the only ones that understand it in all its frightful perfection, he +bent the hand of the chief remorselessly over and backward, until the +palm gaped like the mouth of a dying fish and the knife dropped to the +ground. + +Deerfoot now had both wrists imprisoned. Taggarak gasped and panted and +writhed, but could not twist himself loose. In the trial of strength +the Shawanoe proved himself the superior. Great drops gathered on the +forehead of the Blackfoot. His grin displayed every molar in his head, +and the mouth, stretched to double its usual extent, had that horrible +appearance when the space between the lips at the corners is the same +as in front and the expression is that of a raging wild beast. + +Thus the two stood, their arms sawing up and down and from one side to +another, without the Blackfoot being able to loosen the merciless grip. +He was panting, but no one could have detected any quickening of the +respiration of the Shawanoe. His mouth was set and the light of battle +flashed in his eyes. He did not speak or yield a point. The crisis had +come and he knew he was the victor, just as he knew he would be from +the first. + +The Blackfoot swayed and his moccasins slid here and there over the +ground from the contortion of limbs and body. Then he began pushing +with might and main. His eyes were beginning to clear, but the +perspiration dripped from the twisted coppery features. Reading his +purpose, Deerfoot began pushing also. Neither yielded for a minute or +two, and then the chief was slowly forced backward. There was no +withstanding the tremendous power of the youth, who strove to the last +ounce of his matchless strength. + +Taggarak recoiled a step, then another, then began walking backward, +and the next minute the walk became a trot on the part of both, the +chief retreating and the Shawanoe forcing him faster and faster, though +he struggled and resisted with the same panting desperation as at +first. + +He was still trotting backward with short, increasing steps when +Deerfoot, never relaxing his grasp on the writhing wrists, thrust one +heel behind his enemy, who tripped and went over. To insure due +emphasis in the fall, Deerfoot made a leap as he was going and landed +with both knees on the breast of the Blackfoot, who dropped with a +thump that forced a gasp from his body and literally shook the earth. + +George and Victor Shelton, in their excitement, sprang up from behind +the rock that hid them. When Taggarak went over on his back, with +Deerfoot bearing him down, Victor could restrain himself no longer. +Snatching his cap from his head he swung it aloft, and had opened his +mouth to cheer when the slightly less excited brother clapped his hand +over his lips. + +"What do you mean, you idiot?" + +"I want to cheer for Deerfoot! If I don't I'll bust!" + +"You will get all the busting you want from him if he finds out we came +here, after he told us to stay at home." + +"By gracious! That's so; I forgot it. I'm glad you stopped me; we must +keep mum. Look!" + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +DISCIPLINE IN THE RANKS. + + +The force of the impact and the crushing weight of the Shawanoe's body +knocked Taggarak senseless for the moment. He lay panting, with eyes +half closed and his countenance glistening with moisture. + +Deerfoot, without removing his knees, watched the eyes until they +slowly opened and glared upward with a dazed expression. The youth had +removed his fingers from the wrist of the chief. He now bent his face +close to his and asked: + +"Who now is master--the Blackfoot or the Shawanoe? Whose God is the +greater--Taggarak's or Deerfoot's?" + +But the chieftain was game. He had put up a hurricane fight and had +been conquered--conquered by a youth who carried no weapon in his hand, +and who could have driven out his life at any moment during the +progress of the battle. Instead of slaying his victim, the Shawanoe +had put one indignity after another upon him. + +"Let the Shawanoe take his knife and kill Taggarak! He does not wish to +live!" + +"So Taggarak would do with the Shawanoe, but so does not the Shawanoe, +for he is a Christian," replied Deerfoot, rising from the prostrate +body and stepping back for a couple of paces. + +The Blackfoot was still bewildered. He lay motionless for a few +seconds, staring at the youth looking serenely down upon him. The chief +had been conquered, absolutely, crushingly and to the last degree +humiliatingly; for, most amazing thing of all, his conqueror had +refused to take his life, knowing that it would have been the other way +had the Shawanoe suffered defeat. + +And he who showed this unheard-of mercy professed to be a Christian! +What a strange religion to make a warrior act in that manner! + +Slowly the iron-limbed chieftain climbed to his feet. He was not +looking at the Shawanoe, who had folded his arms and was calmly +watching him. Taggarak stood upright, turned his face away, took three +steps and then paused. His head flirted about like a bird's and he +fixed his burning eyes upon the dusky youth, still posed like a statue, +with arms folded and on the alert for any treachery. + +The Blackfoot gazed steadily into the eyes that met his own without +flinching. He did not speak, but, looking away again, strode solemnly +across the open space, not pausing to pick up his weapon, and +disappeared in the rocky wood. + +Deerfoot remained motionless for several moments, gazing at the point +where the other had passed from sight. Then he reverently turned his +eyes upward and murmured: + +"I thank Thee, my Heavenly Father. Thou art kinder to Deerfoot than he +deserves." + +His next act was most peculiar. He paid no heed to the knife of +Taggarak, but picked up his own. It had a keen edge, and instead of +thrusting the weapon into his girdle he walked to the nearest +undergrowth and began cutting a stick several feet in length and of +nearly an inch's thickness at the butt. + +About this time George and Victor Shelton, from their hiding place, +where they had stealthily watched everything, began to feel disturbed +in mind. + +"What do you suppose he is doing that for?" whispered Victor, peeping +around the corner of the rock. + +"I'm blessed if I know. He is trimming off the twigs, so as to make the +stick smooth." + +"Do you suppose he saw us?" + +"He couldn't. He has mighty sharp eyes, but he had no chance to look +anywhere except in the face of Taggarak, and we haven't shown ourselves +since he left." + +"It's a queer performance anyway, and I don't feel--" + +"Sh! He's looking this way." + +The next moment both boys shivered, for, facing the rock which until +then they were certain had hid them from view, the Shawanoe called: + +"Let my brothers come here. Deerfoot wishes to speak to them." + +"He saw us after all!" gasped Victor. "Let's run!" + +"What good will that do? There's no getting away from him." + +"He looks savage, George; he means business. Can't we combine and lick +him if he tries to play smart with us?" + +"If we could get Mul-tal-la and three or four other Blackfeet we might +have a show; but it would take more than you and me to down him. Come, +it won't do to wait any longer." + +The brothers were pretty well convinced of what was coming and were +scared. To Victor only one possible escape presented itself--that was +to conciliate the Shawanoe. The lad made a brave attempt to do so. + +Coming out from behind the rock, he strode rapidly down the gentle +slope, as if he had just recognized the youth. Victor's face was aglow, +and he certainly meant all he said: + +"I tell you, Deerfoot, that was the greatest victory you ever won! I +don't believe the man ever lived that downed Taggarak, and yet you did +it without any weapon. People won't believe the story, but you can +refer them to us. Ain't it lucky, now, that we happened to be where we +could see you lay out that boasting chief?" + +George caught at the straw thus held out by his brother. + +"I tell you that's so, Deerfoot. The news of this fight is bound to get +out sooner or later. Some who don't know you won't believe anything of +the kind, till we tell them we saw the whole business and it was just +as you say. Ain't you glad, Deerfoot, we happened by chance to be where +we could see it all?" + +The Shawanoe had thrust his knife into his girdle and held the switch +firmly by its larger end. He looked gravely into the face of each lad +while he was speaking. When they ceased he had something to say: + +"When Deerfoot and his brothers left Woodvale was it not said that the +Shawanoe should rule and guide them?" + +"There can't be any question of _that_," Victor promptly replied. + +"And my brothers promised to obey him in all things?" + +"It seems to me I remember something of that kind." + +"Has Deerfoot been a hard master?" + +"We couldn't have had a kinder one. I tell you, Deerfoot, you know more +in five minutes than George and I know in a month, or ever will know. +We couldn't get along without you. We have been pretty obedient, as a +rule, haven't we?" + +"Was not the agreement between Taggarak and Deerfoot that no person +should look upon the fight between them?" + +"Yes; but I don't believe Taggarak kept his promise." + +Deerfoot flashed a look of inquiry at Victor. + +"What does my brother mean by his words? Did he see any other Blackfoot +near?" + +"Well, not exactly; but there were marks in the bushes which looked as +if made by moccasins. I shouldn't wonder if some were hiding there and +ran away when they saw us coming and knew we meant to see you had fair +play." + +The appeal was wasted. Deerfoot took his station between the brothers, +moving them apart so they were separated by a space of five or six +feet. He then deliberately, vigorously and impartially laid the switch +over the shoulders of George and Victor. You would not suspect the vim +with which this disciplining was carried out. Only the brothers +themselves could testify feelingly as to that. + +And the boys had to "grin and bear it," for there was no escape for +them. It was useless to run, and had they tried it they would have been +punished more severely. They were too proud to complain. The +quicker-tempered Victor wanted to revolt and attack the Shawanoe, but +he knew George would not join him, for such rebellion would have been +disastrous to them. They had tested the ability of Deerfoot in that +line too often to doubt his superiority. Had the shadow of a doubt +lingered, the scene they had witnessed a few minutes before would have +dispelled it. + +The rod descended first upon the shoulders of Victor, then upon those +of George, and there was no difference in the force of the blows. Oh, +how they stung! Each boy wanted to scratch the smarting parts, but +grimly stood it out. Finally Victor ventured to say: + +"When you are tired, Deerfoot, you have our permission to stop." + +"Tired! He won't get tired in a week. Our only hope is that he will use +up all the switches in the country." + +And the Shawanoe kept at it till the rod broke in the middle and only +the stump was left in his hand. He flung that aside, and, without +speaking, turned and walked toward the village. As soon as his face was +turned the boys devoted their efforts to rubbing and scratching their +arms, shoulders and backs. + +"How many times do you think he struck us?" ruefully asked George. + +"I guess about four thousand; but I forgot to count." + +"He started in with you and ended with me, so we both got the same. +Gracious alive, but he knows his business!" + +"Anyhow, what we saw was worth all we had to pay. I didn't think he +would do anything of the kind, did you?" + +"No; I thought we might keep our visit a secret, but not many things +escape his eye. I suppose after all he was right." + +"Wait till these smarts let up a little before you ask me to say that," +replied Victor, still rubbing and fidgeting about. "Can't you think of +some way of getting even with him?" + +"I wish I could, but the worst thing anyone can do is to tackle +Deerfoot. We must try to believe we were lucky in getting off as +lightly as we did." + +"Lightly!" sniffed Victor. "I should like to know what you call _heavy_ +if that is light." + +"And he is still mad at us. He went off without speaking, and it may be +days before he gets over his anger." + +Bye and bye the smarts so subsided that the boys felt comparatively +comfortable. As they picked their way homeward their resentment cooled, +and they were able to see things in their proper light. They profoundly +loved and admired the young Shawanoe, and required no one to remind +them of his affection for them. The punishment he had administered was +like that of a father to a wayward child. Moreover, it was well +deserved, and they were willing to confess the fact before they reached +their tepee. + +"There's no getting out of it," said the more impulsive Victor. "He +forbade us to follow him, and it was breaking the agreement between him +and Taggarak. The only thing for us to do when we meet him again is to +say we are sorry and ask his forgiveness. I'm ready to do so. Are you, +George?" + +"Why didn't we try that on him before he gave us the whipping?" + +"It wouldn't have worked. When I saw him cutting and trimming that +switch I knew what was coming, and there was no way for us to dodge +it." + +"It seems pretty hard, after a fellow has had his life almost whaled +out of him, to say he is sorry. It seems to me it's the other chap who +ought to feel sorry." + +"No, we were in the wrong and must apologize. You know how +tender-hearted Deerfoot is. I believe he felt pity for Taggarak, even +though he knew the chief meant to kill him. The Blackfoot isn't the +first enemy Deerfoot has had at his mercy and then spared him." + +When the boys reached their lodge, after meeting and greeting a number +of their dusky friends, they were disappointed not to find Deerfoot +there. He did not come in until late in the afternoon. He raised the +robe at the door, glanced at the brothers, but kept his lips closed. +Victor walked up to him without a moment's hesitation and extended his +hand: + +"Deerfoot, you served us right. We are both sorry. Will you forgive +us?" + +The two saw the moisture creep into the handsome dark eyes and noted +the tremor of the Shawanoe's voice as he took each hand in turn and +said: + +"Yes, Deerfoot forgives you. We are brothers again." + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +"BEHOLD HE PRAYETH." + + +Mul-tal-la the Blackfoot obeyed the command of Taggarak, his chief. But +though he kept away from the meeting place of the duelists, he hovered +not far off, in order to learn at the earliest possible moment the +result of the most important personal encounter that had ever taken +place in the history of the Blackfoot nation. Because of the circuitous +course taken by George and Victor Shelton, Mul-tal-la saw nothing of +them and never learned of the humorous appendix to the tragedy. + +The sight of the Shawanoe returning told who was victor, and a few +brief words between the two, as they met, made known that he had spared +the life of the chief, who slunk silently off in the solitude, no one +but himself knew whither. It was this flight that was on the mind of +Deerfoot and Mul-tal-la, for each felt that momentous consequences were +to flow therefrom. + +The four friends were once more gathered in the home of the guests of +the Blackfoot tribe. Each knew a crisis was at hand that might compel +them, on the edge of the severe northern winter, to depart for other +quarters, and the flight, perhaps, would become impossible because of +the ferocious rage of the humiliated chieftain. + +The Shelton brothers acted the part of listeners, sensibly feeling that +they could contribute nothing to the discussion between Mul-tal-la and +Deerfoot; but no speakers could have asked for more deeply interested +auditors than they. + +"Taggarak has not come back," said the Blackfoot. "Mul-tal-la stopped +at his lodge, and his squaw said she had seen naught of him since this +morning." + +"She does not know what took place?" was the inquiring remark of +Deerfoot. + +"She could not, for he kept his word and told no one before, and," +grimly added the Blackfoot, "he would not tell anyone afterward." + +"What does she think?" + +"That he has gone to one of the other villages. Taggarak is a silent +man, and he sometimes departs in the middle of the night, without +saying a word to anyone. He may be gone for weeks, and no one here will +know anything of it until he returns." + +"What does Mul-tal-la think?" + +"He knows not what to think. If Taggarak is not here to-morrow, then he +will believe the chief is visiting his other warriors." + +"Does he not summon his other chiefs to come to him?" + +"Often; they meet at the Big Lodge. They talk together, when they are +making ready to go on raids among other tribes, and Taggarak gives them +his commands; but he likes to appear in their villages when they do not +look for his coming. What does my brother believe the chief will do +when he comes back?" + +The Shawanoe waited for a minute or two before replying: + +"There is a mist in the eyes of Deerfoot and he cannot see clearly. +Taggarak is brave but cruel. He will not rest under his overthrow. +Deerfoot thinks they will have to fight again." + +"And will Deerfoot spare him once more?" + +"He cannot answer. He will do as God tells him to do." + +Victor Shelton felt that this was a good time for him to add to the +discussion. + +"Mul-tal-la, do you think it is possible Taggarak wants to fight +Deerfoot, after he has been beaten by him? Why should he want to try it +again?" + +"Because he has hope of winning the fight." + +"He can't have any such hope. Why, Deerfoot whipped him without a +weapon in his hand, while Taggarak had his big, ugly knife most of the +time." + +Mul-tal-la had not heard anything of this, and he looked inquiringly at +Deerfoot and then at the boy who had made the amazing statement. Victor +flushed and stammeringly added: + +"That is--it would have been easy for Deerfoot to whip him without any +weapon and with one hand tied behind his back--that is, it looks so to +me and George--and I'm sure he could do it if he wished--confound it, +Deerfoot, _didn't_ you whip him as I said?" + +The visitor turned to the Shawanoe, who gravely nodded his head. + +"Deerfoot has told me things from the good book which he carries with +him, and he said there was One who used to do some things so strange +that they were called miracles." + +"Yes, He did many of them." + +"Then Deerfoot did a miracle if he overthrew Taggarak without the help +of any weapon." + +"No," modestly replied the Shawanoe, "there was no miracle. It was +easier to defeat him without a weapon than with one. Deerfoot wrenched +the knife from his hand and then threw him to the ground; that was +all." + +"That was all!" repeated the Blackfoot, as if to himself. Then he +looked at the boys and the three laughed. + +"Yes, that was all. George or I could have done the same, but we +thought it better to turn the job over to Deerfoot. He's fond of doing +such trifles," said Victor, airily. + +The result of the conference was the decision that naught could be done +except to await the issue of events. All feared the worst, and strove +to prepare for it. The belief was that the rage in the breast of Chief +Taggarak would lead him to merciless measures, not only against his +visitors, but against all of his own people who had showed an +inclination to embrace the new religion. + +Three days passed and nothing was heard of the chief. He was still +absent, and the general belief of his people that he was among the +other villages averted misgiving. Only those in the secret were in +dread. But the seed planted by Deerfoot began to bear fruit. Inquiries +came to him, and the excitement over the religion he brought, even +though subdued, spread among the warriors and women of the tribe. +Finally Mul-tal-la came to him with the surprising request that he +would address the Indians in the Big Lodge on the all-important +subject. In making the request, Mul-tal-la the Blackfoot spoke for +others. Without hesitation the Shawanoe replied that he would do as +desired. He felt it was his duty, and he was the last one to shrink. + +Near the middle of the primitive settlement was a structure known as +the "Big Lodge." It was of the simplest build, being some forty feet in +length by about half that width. It consisted of upright poles at the +corners, with other supports along the sides, and a roof of boughs +similar to that of the royal lodge. All the sides were open; there were +no seats and no provisions for fire. Consequently the temperature was +always the same as that outdoors. + +It was the custom of the Blackfeet to hold their councils in this +place, Taggarak being fond of summoning his chiefs and leading warriors +thither, while they smoked their pipes and settled questions of state. +Most of the time the barren structure was deserted. + +On a bleak afternoon late in autumn, when a few inches of snow lay on +the ground and the wind moaned among the leafless branches, Deerfoot +the Shawanoe and the Shelton brothers wended their way to the Big +Lodge. The boys paused at the edge of the assemblage and silently took +their place among the listeners. They, as well as their friend, were +astonished to see the crowd that had gathered. Warriors and women, with +here and there a child, were seated everywhere on the bare ground, till +it was hard to find room for another person. No one could fail to be +impressed by the air of solemnity that shadowed each dusky face. Nearly +every male and female sat with a shawl wrapped around the shoulders, +for the air was biting, and no one had any protection from it except +clothing. Victor whispered to his brother: + +"I never expected to see anything like this. Who would have thought +that the few words Deerfoot has spoken about our religion could have +stirred up such deep feeling?" + +An Indian scorns to betray curiosity or excitement, and only a few of +the warriors and squaws looked up as the young Shawanoe picked his way +through and among the multitude, who numbered several hundred, to the +farther end of the space, where he turned to face the expectant +listeners. He had left his rifle at the tepee, but his knife was in his +girdle. To those who had slight knowledge of him he looked his simple, +natural self; but George and Victor, when they scanned their friend +observed a deeper flush in his face and a brighter gleam in the eyes, +which revealed to them the profound emotion that stirred his soul. + +Deerfoot stood for a minute, looking over the swarthy faces turned +expectantly toward him. He had prayed many times for strength to meet +this ordeal, and he knew he would do so. + +Then he began speaking in his low, musical voice, which was clearly +heard by those farthest removed. He used the Blackfoot tongue, so that +only a part of his words were understood by George and Victor, and +never halted or hesitated until the interruption came. + +"My friends," said he, "the heart of Deerfoot is glad to tell you about +the Great Spirit who is the Father of the red men as well as of the +palefaces. Many, many moons ago that Father made this world; the sun +that shines by day and the moon and stars that rule at night; the +mountains, the woods, the rivers, the prairies, the rocks, the clouds +and all that you see about you. He gave His children game to hunt, and +He caused the fish to grow in the streams and the corn and fruit to +spring from the ground. There was nothing that His children needed that +He did not give to them. + +"Was not that Father kind? Could any father be as good to his children +as God was to those He put on the earth to live together? Should not +those children love Him and try to live as He wished them to live? But +they were wicked and did not care for Him. They fought and killed one +another and did all they could to offend their Heavenly Father. They +were so bad that bye and bye He turned away His face in anger. He would +have slain them as they deserved, but He had a Son, good and pure like +Himself. This Son took the load of all the sins of the world on his +heart. He came to the earth and told the people how sad God was because +they did evil. Some heeded His words, but bad men took the Son, whom we +call our Saviour, because He saved us all--you and me and +everybody--and they drove nails through his hands and feet, and let Him +hang on two crosspieces of wood till He died the most painful of +deaths. He could have killed those who treated Him so cruelly, but He +chose to die so that the way would be opened for all men and women and +children to come to God, who was angry no longer, because the Son had +taken their place and suffered in their stead. + +"The Great Spirit, whom we call God or our Heavenly Father, has made +the path so straight and so free from briars that the smallest child +can walk therein without harm. He wants you to become Christians and to +believe in Him. A Christian is one who does all he can to make others +happy. You must not go to war, and only fight when others attack you or +those whom you love. You must be merciful and forgiving. Never cause +anyone to suffer. Give food to the hungry, help those who have fallen +to climb to their feet, take them by the hand and lead them if they are +weak. Think all the time of new ways of making other persons smile. You +must pray to God every morning and night and, when you have the chance, +through the day. If you do this, a sweet peace, such as you have never +known before, will come into your heart. You will not care for pain or +hunger or thirst or suffering, for the happiness of pleasing your +Heavenly Father will make you forget all these. When you die He will +carry you to those blessed hunting grounds, where you shall meet all +the friends who have gone on before and where you and they shall be +happy forevermore." + +During the utterance of this simple plea the Big Lodge was as still as +the tomb. It is safe to believe that not a man or woman present failed +to be impressed, for every person, savage or civilized, pagan or +Christian, is profoundly interested in the most transcendant theme that +can engage the human mind--the saving of man's soul and the preparation +for the life to come. None other can compare with it. It is the one +supreme question of the ages. + +Those who looked at Deerfoot thought he had finished his address, but +it was not so. George and Victor Shelton were the first to understand +from his manner that something outside of the lodge had checked him. He +was looking beyond the boys at some object that had made him cease +speaking. The boys turned their heads to learn the meaning of the +interruption. As they did so they heard some one approaching with a +rapid step. + +It was Taggarak, the chief, his face aflame, his stride long and rapid +and his intense gaze centered on the young Shawanoe. Paying no heed to +those in his way, he brushed past, overturning several and plowed +straight through the crowd toward Deerfoot, who calmly awaited his +coming. + +Every eye was fixed upon the terrible chieftain, and hardly one of his +people doubted that he meant to assail the Shawanoe. The hearts of +George and Victor Shelton stood still, for they felt that a tragedy was +about to open. + +Instead of drawing his knife, Deerfoot placed both hands behind his +back, after the idle manner of one who feels little interest in what is +going on before him. + +Within a couple of paces of Deerfoot, Taggarak wheeled around, and, in +a voice of thunder addressed his people: + +"The Shawanoe speaks with a single tongue! His words are true! The +Great Spirit he tells you about is the true and only Great Spirit! +Taggarak did not think so; he scorned him, but his eyes have been +opened and he now sees. He has been wandering in the woods for days and +nights, trying to flee from the anger of that Great Spirit. His eyes +were filled with tears; he lay on his face and cried to Him; he did not +eat nor drink nor sleep; but the Great Spirit, the true Great Spirit, +spoke loving words to Taggarak. He raised him to his feet; He showed +him that all the briars had been taken from his path. Taggarak looked +around and all the darkness was gone and the sun was shining in the +sky. The Great Spirit was pleased. He told Taggarak he was now His son +and all shall be well with him. + +"Heed the words of the Shawanoe, for they are true. Taggarak is a +Christian and wishes all the Blackfeet to become Christians." + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + +LIGHT IN DARKNESS. + + +It must not be thought that the large assemblage which had gathered in +the Big Lodge were of one mind, or even that a majority were ready to +accept the new religion that was explained to them by its model +exemplar, Deerfoot the Shawanoe. A few yearned for the light, and had +already learned enough of the elemental truths to be drawn toward them; +but the majority were attracted by that potent cause--curiosity. They +listened closely. The simple words of the preacher showed clearly that +the new faith was the opposite of the old; that, if accepted by them, +it meant a revolution in their beliefs and practices. + +Most of the men and a few of the women revolted at the thought. To them +the most powerful of motives in human conduct were those of revenge, of +prowess in battle, and of mercilessness toward an enemy. To be told +that they must root out this passion and be governed by the Golden Rule +was turning themselves into squaws, and spurning that nobility which is +the crowning glory of the red man's life. Their demeanor was stolid. +The wise Deerfoot plainly saw, however, that his doctrine found favor +with only a few. He made his appeal as clear and direct as he knew how, +but he did not need to be told that he was only partially successful. + +The dramatic entrance and declaration by Chief Taggarak of the "pangs +of transformation" through which he had passed and his emergence into +the new light could not fail to be impressive and to add to the force +of what had just been said by the Shawanoe. None the less, it had also +an opposite effect in some cases. The warriors who had accepted the +leadership for years of one of the greatest chiefs that ever swayed the +destinies of the Blackfoot people now repudiated him. He upon whom they +had relied so long to lead them in battle and of whose unquestioned +bravery and prodigious prowess all knew, had become a woman! But _they_ +would remain true warriors and maintain the prestige of their tribe as +among the most aggressive in the Northwest. + +Still Taggarak swept a number with him. Probably when he was through +with his burning appeal a fifth of those present were under +"conviction," and could be counted upon in favorable circumstances to +become believers in the faith preached by the One who spake and taught +as never man spake and taught. It may be said that a half of that +number were resolute in this decision. Their sentiments were +crystallized. The seed had been sown on good ground and was bearing +fruit. + +The young Shawanoe was tactful. For him to attempt to add anything to +the words of Taggarak would be to weaken them. They were the climax, +and silence was golden. Throughout the eloquent appeal of the chief, +Deerfoot stood with his hands idly folded behind him, his eyes fixed +upon the face of Taggarak, whose pose gave a good view of his features, +and listening in the very intentness of his soul. When the chief had +uttered his last word he gathered his blanket about his shoulders and +strode out of the Big Lodge, looking neither to the right nor left, and +again failing to notice his wife and little boy, who sat on the ground +and whom he brushed as he passed into the open air. He did not glance +behind, but continued his dignified, deliberate stride till he was +hidden from sight among the trees beyond the cleared space. + +Before this, Deerfoot, without speaking a word, picked his way through +the throng, who surveyed him curiously but did not stir until he was +outside. The Shawanoe glanced at George and Victor Shelton, and by a +look indicated that they were to follow him. They did so, silent like +the others, and the three returned to their own tepee without +exchanging a word on the road. They were awed by what they had seen and +heard, and respected their friend too much to break in upon his +meditations. He sat down on the furs in his usual place and they busied +themselves with what may be considered their household duties, speaking +only now and then to each other. The afternoon was drawing to a close, +and, but for the fire that was kept burning, it would have been dark +within the lodge. They prepared their meal, but when Deerfoot was +invited to eat he shook his head, rose to his feet and passed out. + +The Shawanoe had no more time than to straighten up in the open air +when he was face to face with Mul-tal-la, who was on his way to see +him. They pressed each other's hand and the visitor said: + +"Chief Taggarak wishes that his brother the Shawanoe shall come to his +lodge." + +"Deerfoot goes there," replied the youth, who had been meditating doing +so. "Will my brother go with Deerfoot?" + +"Only to the lodge. Taggarak does not wish to see _him_." + +The two walked side by side, the hearts of both full. It was so dark +that they drew no attention to themselves. Just before the well-known +home of the chief was reached, Mul-tal-la turned off without so much as +a farewell word. + +The war chief was expecting his visitor. He had sent his wife and boy +away in order that he might be alone with the Shawanoe. He sat with his +back against the rock, his position allowing the firelight to show his +face clearly, especially one side of it. As he recognized his visitor +he smiled and extended his hand, after the manner of white men. +Deerfoot quickened his pace and grasped the palm and laid the other on +the shoulder of the chieftain. How different from their meeting by the +lookout rock several days before! + +"The heart of Deerfoot is glad," said the visitor, in a low, tremulous +voice. + +"Taggarak hears the birds sing again. There are no clouds before the +sun. He is happy, for the Great Spirit smiles upon him." + +One of the most marvelous facts connected with the true religion, and +itself a proof of its divinity, is its complete adaptability to every +condition of life and to every degree of intelligence. Its essentials +are as readily grasped by the clodhopper as by the profoundest scholar +whose years are spent in delving into the mysteries of science. No +finite mind can fathom the mysteries of life, of death, of sleep, of +the beginning, the end, of eternity, of the real nature of the soul and +of God, how He came into existence; nor, indeed, shall we ever +comprehend in all their fullness the simplest phenomena around us. What +is the essence of color or taste or smell? How is the word spoken by us +understood by him to whom it is addressed? When we move a hand or foot, +where and how does the action _begin_? What is the theoretical limit of +divisibility or expansion? These and scores of similar questions have +only to be asked for us to feel the utter helplessness of our powers of +understanding. + +But to the untutored savage, shivering in his rude wigwam and manacled +by his sombre superstitions, the essential facts for the saving of his +soul become as clear as the sun in the unclouded heavens. The man with +a dwarfed intellect can see as plainly as he whose telescope, sweeping +the heavens, carries his vision to the bounds of the universe. + + "All our philosophic pedants, all our sons of science know + Not a whit more than that dullard knew a million years ago." + +Deerfoot stayed with Taggarak for several hours. No one disturbed them, +and the chief would have kept his comforter still longer had not the +latter felt that it was better to leave the Blackfoot to his communings +with God. + +When at last the Shawanoe emerged like a shadow from the lodge of the +chief he did not go to his own home. Instead, he turned off, passed +swiftly across the open space that had been the scene of so many +contests and games, entered the hilly section and did not pause until +he came to the place where he and Taggarak had fought several days +before. + +Deerfoot had left his rifle at home and was alone. Folding his arms and +standing on the very spot where he had flung Taggarak to the earth and +held him at his mercy, he looked up at the faintly moonlit sky and +murmured: + +"Deerfoot does not deserve such happiness as now fills his heart. He +thanks God for His mercy." + +Never in all his brief but eventful career had the young Shawanoe felt +more unmistakably the presence of the Father whom he worshiped and +strove to obey. Ambition gratified, triumph obtained, earthly love, +physical or mental achievements, defeat of opponents, wealth, pleasure, +gratification of taste and longings, all these combined cannot give to +the human soul that thrilling happiness which kindles and glows and +burns into life when Conscience whispers, "Well done!" and we know that +some thought or word or deed of ours is pleasing to God. + +Nothing was or could be more real to Deerfoot than the cause of the +radiance that suffused his being when he came from the lodge of the +Blackfoot chieftain. Science may try to explain such emotions as an +exaltation resulting from physical causes, but no such explanation can +suffice. We feel that which we feel and know that which we know. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + +HOMEWARD BOUND. + + +Despite the remarkable experiences of George and Victor Shelton in the +Blackfoot village, they found, as the weeks and months passed, a +monotony that deepened their homesickness and caused them to yearn for +the day when they could start southward and leave the bleak region +forever behind. The winters in that latitude are generally severe, and +the brothers got a taste of cold weather such as they had never known +on the other side of the Mississippi. There must have been repeated +spells when, had a Fahrenheit thermometer been in existence, it would +have shown a record of thirty and forty degrees below zero. + +People who are accustomed to such Arctic experiences know how to +prepare for them, and Deerfoot and the boys would have been foolish had +they neglected so plain a duty. With wood abundant on every hand, a +bountiful supply was kept within the tepee and outside, and weeks +passed without the fire being allowed to go out. With the soft, warm +furs at command, no one of the three met with more than a brief +discomfort because of the fearful cold. + +The chief cause of anxiety was the horses. All were provided with +shelter and carefully looked after. A good deal of grass had been +pulled and much cottonwood and willow bark laid in stock. If the +animals could not fare sumptuously, they had enough to keep them in +good condition. Fully half a dozen of the Blackfoot horses were frozen +to death, and those belonging to our friends would have perished but +for the care they received. They were screened by blankets during the +unusually severe weather, and Whirlwind received the tenderest +attention from Deerfoot. More than once the Shawanoe stole out of the +tepee in the depth of the night and tramped over the snow through an +atmosphere that was still and as biting as the teeth of a saw. No +matter how silently the youth moved forward, the stallion discovered +his approach and whinneyed his welcome. Then when the blizzards raged +Deerfoot never forgot to call and assure himself that nothing was +neglected that could shield the faithful creatures. Thus they were +saved from harm until the weather moderated upon the approach of +spring. + +With the snow lying several feet deep on the level and piled ten times +higher among the mountains, Deerfoot and the boys hunted with their +friends on snow-shoes. It was exhilarating, but the resistless cold +took away much of the pleasure that otherwise would have come to the +lads. As for the Shawanoe, summer and winter seemed alike to him. + +When the village was helpless in the grasp of old Boreas, the +inhabitants did little except cower in their lodges around their fires +and eat and sleep. This sort of existence grew almost intolerable to +the brothers. With every muscle and nerve yearning for action, they +became impatient and sometimes fretful. When they spoke of themselves +as prisoners it was the truth. + +Taggarak acted kindly toward George and Victor, but never showed any +special friendship for them. It may have been because they belonged to +another race. Toward Deerfoot he displayed a profound gratitude, a deep +affection and reverence, amounting at times almost to worship. He was +the messenger who brought the glad tidings of the one and only true +God, and the chief in some way or other associated him with the divine +message itself, as if he were a part of it. + +The snow and cold shut off communication almost entirely between the +Blackfoot villages. Early in the winter and toward spring several +warriors came down from the most northern settlement, but they did not +remain long. It was known, however, among them all that Taggarak, the +leading chief, had accepted the new religion, and his authority +naturally weakened, but nothing in the nature of a revolt took place +against his supremacy. + +Deerfoot frequently visited the chief, where none was so welcome as he. +Taggarak never went to the tepee of the Shawanoe, for he preferred +always to see Deerfoot alone. Mul-tal-la, Spink, Jiggers and seven +other warriors openly confessed the Christian religion. Nearly double +that number of squaws--among them the wife of the chief--did the same. +Slowly and surely the leaven worked, and when the time drew near for +the departure of the visitors it is probable that the number of +converts was doubled, with the promise of further increase. + +Deerfoot and the boys made the parting as "informal" as possible. All +through the winter the Shawanoe had impressed upon the Blackfeet that +this separation in the nature of things would be brief. The time was +certain to come, at no distant day, when they would all be together +again. So he smiled, the boys bade good-bye to the numerous lads with +whom they had played and hunted, and were so happy over the prospect of +soon seeing their own home again that they could not repress their +delight nor pay much attention to the regret, if not sadness, of the +aboriginal youngsters. + +Deerfoot's last hour in the village was spent alone with Taggarak in +his lodge. What took place there and what was said by each were never +known to anyone beside themselves. + +By the middle of the afternoon our friends had penetrated a number of +miles to the eastward. A good deal of snow remained, and they had to +pick their way with care. They would have been wise had they remained +another month, as they were urged to do; but Deerfoot himself was as +homesick as his companions and as willing as they to face the hardships +that had to be faced for several weeks to come. + +Jack, Prince, Zigzag and even Whirlwind showed the effects of their +long confinement, but all appeared to share the enthusiasm of their +owners and worked royally to get forward. When they had traveled the +distance named, the rest given them by their masters was not unwelcome. + +Naturally, upon halting, all turned their eyes westward. A moderate +mountain spur hid the village from sight, but each knew where it lay. +George and Victor scanned the field of vision with the aid of the +glass, but noted nothing unusual. When Deerfoot took the instrument he +stood for a long time directed toward a certain spot. He expected to +see some object, and was not disappointed. On the top of the same bare +brown rock where he had caught sight of Mul-tal-la when Deerfoot was +coming to the village for the first time, he descried another form. It +was not that of Mul-tal-la; it was Taggarak, who had climbed alone to +the place, and, silent and motionless as a statue, was gazing after the +little party of horsemen as they slowly faded from view in the +distance. + +George and Victor kept their eyes on their friend, and when they noted +the length of time he held the glass leveled they suspected the cause. + +"He sees some one," said George, in a low tone. + +"It must be Taggarak. Look!" + +Deerfoot had lowered the instrument and was peering westward with his +unaided vision. He was testing whether he could thus discern that which +the glass revealed plainly. Evidently he did so, though the boys could +not locate the form, even when they knew almost precisely where to look +for it. + +Standing upright, the Shawanoe took his blanket from the back of +Whirlwind and swung it back and forth over his head, for fully a dozen +times. Then, dropping it to his feet, he brought the glass again to his +eye. + +"Taggarak has seen it," whispered Victor, who, like his brother, was +watching the face of Deerfoot and noted the smile come to his +countenance. + +Such was the fact. As the Shawanoe looked again he observed the +chieftain rise from his sitting position and reply to the signal by +waving his own blanket. The trained vision of the veteran warrior saw +as clearly as those of youth. The action of Taggarak brought him into +view of the lads, both noting the flickering of what resembled a mere +speck in the distance. Finally, Deerfoot lowered the glass and turned +about, as if to say that was the final parting from the chief who held +him in such loving remembrance. + +The mountain peaks on every hand were covered with snow. On the lower +ranges this would gradually dissolve under the rays of the sun, but +others were so lofty that the white blanket remained throughout the +year. While gazing at a towering range to the northeast the three +witnessed the descent of an avalanche. Deerfoot was the first to see +it, and directed the notice of the boys to the vast disturbance. + +The glance revealed nothing unusual, the enormous extent of slope +looking as if it were motionless, but a second look told the truth. A +grove of pines at the base of the range were suddenly snuffed out. This +was because they disappeared under the prodigious mass of snow and ice +that swept over them. Then a dark, irregular line, running right and +left, and roughly parallel with the crest of the range, came into view. +It was an eighth of a mile in length and the narrow width rapidly +increased until there was a rent or yawn of several hundred feet, +zigzagging from one side to the other. The dark color of this chasm was +due to rocks and ground, and marked the break between the two sections +or divisions of the avalanche. The upper portion caught and held, while +the remainder swept downward without check. Thus a huge gap was opened, +through which the brown earth and stones showed. + +The next strange sight was that of boulders, some of them weighing many +tons, flung high in air and tossed about like so many corks. One might +have thought that Titans were disporting themselves as did the fabled +gods on Mount Olympus. As the inconceivable mountain of snow crashed +onward it spread out at the base of the range, and finally settled to +rest. Had an ordinary town been in its path it would have been buried +to the tops of the highest steeples. + +Nearly all this had taken place before the three spectators heard the +deep, thunderous roar that rolled across the space and told of the +stupendous mass that had been loosened by the undermining rays of the +sun or by some trifling disturbance of the atmosphere. + +"If we should be caught in anything like that," said Victor, "it would +take us a good while to dig out." + +"My brothers might _never_ dig out," said Deerfoot. + +"What is there to hinder?" + +"There are many stones and rocks and boulders tumbling about in the +snow, and they would be likely to kill us." + +"Then, Deerfoot, you must keep your eyes open for avalanches. It would +be pretty hard for the horses, though Zigzag has sort of got used to +it." + +Little need for warning the Shawanoe of his duty. That was what he had +been attending to all his life. He had never placed himself and friends +in the way of an impending avalanche. Recalling their course since +leaving the village, the brothers understood better than before the +cause of more than one tortuous winding by their guide, when they had +been unable to guess the reason for such quixotic turns that did not +lessen the labor of traveling itself. + +It was not yet midday, and the halt was not made for food for either +man or beast. In truth, grass was so scarce, except here and there in +the sheltered nooks and depressions, that some dependence would have to +be placed for awhile on the barks of trees. Zigzag showed a meekness +that roused distrust on the part of the boys. He must have found the +heavy pack quite onerous, but he did not rebel. Whirlwind showed little +lessening of his aristocratic tastes, and refused to mingle on anything +like equal terms with the common stock around him. + +When Deerfoot and his companions were journeying westward they decided +to return by a different route from the Blackfoot country. Their first +intention was to travel eastward until they reached the upper waters of +the Mississippi, and then make their way down that stream to +civilization, following in a general way the course of the mighty +stream. With their horses, and without large boats, they could not +utilize the current, unless perhaps after descending a long distance +they were able to construct a large raft. + +This plan, which would have taken them through the hunting grounds of +the Assiniboines, was changed, and they turned to the southeast, having +been told that that course offered less difficulties to them. They gave +up their former plan because of their wish to enter a moderate climate +as soon as possible. Although spring was well begun, they had a good +deal of snow and ice to encounter, and were likely to meet it for weeks +to come. This was shown on their second day, when a driving storm of +snow and sleet forced them to seek shelter for themselves and horses, +and another day passed before they could resume their journey. + +The most trying difficulty was that of crossing streams, which were +more numerous than they had supposed. Some were mountain torrents of +only a few yards width, others deserved the name of rivers, and the +current of each was of icy coldness. More than once they saw blocks of +ice grinding and tumbling over one another as they plunged rapidly +onward. It was so dangerous at times for the horses to attempt to swim +across, and so hard and disagreeable for the youths, that hours were +spent in hunting for a fording place. Fortunately they were always able +to gather enough fuel to make themselves comfortable at night; grass +became more plentiful and no trouble was had in procuring game. This +generally consisted of bison, but it was a great improvement when they +were able to bring down a Rocky Mountain sheep. This animal does not +bear wool, but hair like that of the deer, and is larger than the +largest domestic sheep. The horns of the males attain great size, +starting from just above the eyes, though not touching at the bases, +and curving over so as to include all the space between the ears. The +meat at certain seasons is very palatable and held in high favor. The +animal is generally known by the name of the "big horn," and is so +skilful a climber and so alert that it is quite a feat for a hunter to +bring down a specimen. Deerfoot was the only one on this return journey +who was able to bag the game, which never failed to elude George and +Victor Shelton. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + +A MEMORABLE MEETING. + + +If you will examine the map of the State of Montana you will note that +the central county bears the name of Fergus, while one of the counties +lying directly south is Yellowstone. The boundary between these two is +the Musselshell River, which, flowing directly northward, separates +Custer and Dawson counties, joining the Missouri at the northeastern +corner of Fergus County. It was in the latter part of May, 1805, that +Deerfoot and the two Shelton boys, after a long, wearisome ride and +tramp through a wild and unknown region, broken by mountain spurs and +crossed by numberless streams, arrived at the mouth of the Musselshell. + +Even with summer hardly a fortnight off, ice formed at night, flurries +of snow filled the air at times and the camp fire became a necessity. +And yet our friends were plagued by mosquitoes, grass was plentiful, +and there was no lack of game. The party seemed to be sharing the +summer and winter seasons, with the most disagreeable features of both. + +Having followed the Missouri so far, Deerfoot said that a crossing +place must be found before the morrow, for it was inevitable that the +farther they went down stream the larger it would become, because of +its numerous tributaries. The Missouri was an eighth of a mile across +at its junction with the Musselshell, but its current was gentle. Not +an Indian had been seen for four days, and Deerfoot was on foot +searching the northern shore for a good crossing place when George +Shelton called out: + +"Look! There are white men on the other side of the river!" + +Deerfoot had observed them and had halted and scrutinized them with no +little interest and wonder. The first sight was of six or eight men +coming round a bend in the Missouri, all having hold of a long elk-skin +rope which, passing over the shoulder of each, was fastened to a large +pirogue. Directly behind them was a similar boat, and then six small +canoes, the whole string being towed by fully a score of men. The boats +contained a large amount of luggage, while a dozen men, one of whom was +a negro servant, took turns at the labor. + +Since the afternoon was drawing to a close the party came to a pause, +and the next minute were looking across the stream at the three youths +with their four animals, the riders having dismounted, each party much +impressed by sight of the other. At the suggestion of Deerfoot, Victor +Shelton acted as spokesman. + +"Helloa!" called the lad, "Who are you?" + +A man answered in a clear voice: + +"This is a United States expedition under Captains Lewis and Clark, on +its way to the Pacific Ocean. Who are you?" + +"This is an American expedition under Deerfoot the Shawanoe, on its way +from the Pacific Ocean." + +The man turned and said something to a companion near him. They seemed +amused by the reply, and the former speaker called back: + +"Won't you join us in camp?" + +"We shall be glad to do so. We are hunting for a ford." + +"I don't think you will find any. We will send our canoes to you and +you can swim your horses over." + +"We shall be very much obliged, and shall be glad to stay with you till +morning." + +A few minutes later two canoes, each in charge of a single man, put out +from the southern shore and were paddled across the Missouri to our +friends. The luggage was removed from the back of Zigzag and placed in +one of the boats, which was so deeply laden that it could carry no one +beside the white man. The other was buoyant enough, though severely +taxed, to sustain the four. The horses swam beside the boats. + +When Deerfoot took his place he said to the white man: + +"My brother has worked hard. Will he not let Deerfoot take the paddle?" + +"I have no objection," replied the other, with a grin, "if you think +you know how to do it better than I." + +"No better than my brother, but I hope nearly as well." + +"Just watch him," added Victor. "If there's anybody on either side of +the Mississippi that can beat that Shawanoe handling a canoe, I'll eat +him, boots and all." + +Deerfoot had no wish to display his skill, but since it was impossible +for him to paddle without doing that he quickly won the admiration of +the fellow, who was tired and glad to be relieved from work. He noted +the easy grace and slight effort with which the dusky youth drove the +craft athwart the current, quickly leaving the other boat behind, and +called to his companion: + +"Pete, he knows his business! Never seen his like. Hitch your canoe +fast and he'll tow you over without using more than one hand and with +both eyes shet." + +Deerfoot acted as if he did not understand the words, and impelled the +craft so accurately that when it touched shore it did so at a point +precisely opposite the spot where he and his companions had entered the +craft. + +While our friends were crossing the Missouri the explorers completed +their preparations for the evening. They had toiled hard all day in +pulling, pushing and paddling the boats up stream, for there were not +many places where progress could be made by any other means. The +pirogues were furnished with sails, and now and then a strong favorable +wind lightened the toil of the men. + +When Deerfoot and the boys stepped out of the boat and came up the low +but steep bank, two persons, attired in rough garb resembling that worn +by hunters, came forward and cordially received them. The one in +advance extended his hand and said: + +"I am Captain Meriwether Lewis, and this is my friend, Captain William +Clark. We are glad to meet you." + +As he spoke he offered his hand to George Shelton, who introduced +himself and then his companions. + +"This is my twin brother Victor, though he hardly looks it. This is our +guide, Deerfoot the Shawanoe." + +The two officers welcomed the little party, and Captain Lewis added: + +"We should be glad to have you spend several days with us, but you seem +to be traveling in the opposite direction." + +"Yes," said George, "we are homeward bound, and have been gone so long +that we feel in somewhat of a hurry." + +"May I ask where your home is?" + +"In southern Ohio, at the settlement of Woodvale, near the mouth of the +Miami." + +"You are a long way from there." + +"Yes," Victor took it upon himself to remark, "but we have been a good +deal farther." + +"When did you leave Woodvale?" + +"About a year ago." + +"And how far west have you been?" + +"Far enough to get a glimpse of the Pacific Ocean." + +"That is _our_ destination. We thought we were to be the first white +men to make the journey." + +"So you will be, for we did not go all the way to the coast. I suppose +you will do that?" + +"Such are our instructions from President Jefferson." + +While this conversation was going on other members of the exploring +party gathered round. George had yielded the place of spokesman to his +brother, and Deerfoot stood a few paces behind him. He was conscious of +the curious scrutiny he was under from several of the members, but he +acted as if unaware of it and held his peace. But he, too, was using +his eyes and listening to the talk of the leaders, in whom he was much +interested. + +Victor fancied he detected just a shade of disappointment in the last +remark of Captain Lewis, and he hastened to add: + +"We amount to nothing. Only two of us belong to your race, and we +cannot ask to be considered as men for a few years to come." + +"You are husky-looking youngsters," added Captain Clark, from his place +beside his associate, as he looked admiringly at the two lads. + +"Where did you spend the winter?" continued Lewis. + +"In the Blackfoot country, to the northwest. We reached there last +autumn and stayed until a few weeks ago." + +"I need not ask you if you were well treated, for your looks show +that." + +"They were all our friends. We should have perished so far north had we +not found refuge among them." + +"But we are forgetting our hospitality. We will have your horses looked +after. Come over by the camp for supper, which will soon be ready. That +is the finest horse I ever saw. Which of you is his owner?" + +"He belongs to Deerfoot." + +"Where did he get him?" + +"Last year the Shawanoe's horse was hurt so badly that he had to kill +him. Soon after we came across this stallion and Deerfoot managed to +capture and tame him." + +"He looks as if he might have been the king of a drove." + +"He was. The Shawanoe cut him out and conquered him." + +Now Deerfoot, while crossing the river, had warned the boys not to +indulge in any boasts about him, as you know they were fond of doing. +Despite his matchless prowess and skill, he disliked, above everything +else, to be paraded before others and to be forced into showing what he +was able to do. It was painful to George and Victor to be compelled to +suppress their feelings in this way, but they meant to obey their +friend, so far as they possibly could. + +It was evident that neither Captain Lewis nor Clark nor any of the +listeners believed the statement just made by Victor Shelton. The +latter glanced at the Shawanoe for permission to explain. Deerfoot +wrinkled his brow and shook his head. So the explanation was not +made--just then. + +The group now sauntered over to the large fire that had been kindled a +few rods back from the river bank. Three men were busy preparing the +evening meal, the others sauntering here and there, looking after the +luggage, a portion of which had been brought ashore. Deerfoot walked +over to Whirlwind, who was expecting such attention, and guided him +some distance inland, where there was plenty of succulent grass and he +could graze apart from the common herd. That equine would never lose +his pride until he died. Patting his nose and softly bidding him +good-bye, the Shawanoe hastened back to his friends, who had seated +themselves on a fallen tree on one side of the fire, while Captains +Lewis and Clark were similarly placed opposite. Two of the men were +passing around ordinary tin plates, but no knives and no forks were +called into use, one's fingers serving in their stead. + +[Illustration: A Visit from Captains Lewis and Clark.] + +The explorers had not suffered from any lack of game. The catfish taken +from the river weighed three or four pounds apiece, and several deer, +elks and bears had been shot. Among the latter was one belonging to the +grizzly species. To show the tenacity of these mammoth brutes, the +journal of the explorers records that after the beast had been shot +through the heart "he ran at his usual pace nearly a quarter of a mile +before he fell." Wild geese were seen in such numbers that their +killing often became so easy that it could not be called sport. + +By the time our friends had completed their meal night had fully come, +and the drop in the temperature made the warmth of the blaze pleasant. +A second fire had been started at some distance, where most of the men +gathered. Being apart from their leaders, there was more freedom of +action and speech. In the course of the evening the boys heard the +strains of a violin coming from the other camp, and, turning their +heads, saw one of the men seated on a boulder with his head thrown back +and vigorously sawing on his fiddle, while his companions were dancing +in the open space in front, which was lit up by the firelight. Most of +the hardy fellows solemnly swayed their bodies and shuffled back and +forth with their arms akimbo, but others were more lively and dashed +off jigs, reels and rigadoons. A French _voyageur_ suddenly threw up +his heels, supporting himself on his hands, and kept excellent time to +the notes of the fiddle. + +Neither Lewis nor Clark had ever heard of Deerfoot, but it soon +developed that three of their men, Joseph and Reuben Shields and George +Shannon, of Kentucky, knew a good deal about him. Shannon was but a boy +himself, being only seventeen years old, but had once met the Shawanoe +along the Ohio, when he was in the company of Simon Kenton. Deerfoot +recalled the incident, and was glad to renew the acquaintance. At the +invitation of Shannon he walked with him to the farther camp fire, and +became a pleased witness of the boisterous sport of the men. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + +LEWIS AND CLARK'S EXPEDITION. + + +With George and Victor Shelton seated on the fallen tree on one side of +the camp fire, and Captains Lewis and Clark on the other, these two +famous explorers told the story of their expedition, which must always +retain an historical interest for all of us. + +As early as 1785, while Jefferson was in Paris, he became impressed +with the value of the Northwest. This interest increased after his +return home, and when he became President he secured an appropriation +of twenty-five hundred dollars from Congress for the purpose of +defraying the expense of an exploration of the vast region to the +northwest of the Mississippi. This appropriation was made in February, +1803. + +The area of Louisiana was more than a million square miles, and greater +than that of the whole United States as it then existed. It was +purchased from France for the sum of fifteen million dollars, the +treaty to that effect between the two governments being ratified in the +summer of the year named. By this single transaction the dominion of +the United States was extended across the whole continent of North +America, from the Atlantic to the Pacific. + +The exploring party that entered this enormous region was under the +command of Captains Meriwether Lewis and William Clark. It will be +noted that both of these officers held the same rank. Military law does +not permit the anomaly of equal authority, and Clark was really the +junior, but in point of fact the rights of the two were the same. They +were so considerate toward each other that no difference ever arose, +and "the actual command and conduct of the expedition devolved upon +each in exactly equal degree." + +Lewis belonged to an old Virginia family and early displayed +enterprise, boldness and discretion. He won the promotion to a +captaincy at the age of twenty-two, and was barely thirty years of age +when called to take part in this memorable exploration. Clark was also +a native of Virginia, but his childhood had been spent in Kentucky, +whither his parents removed. He was a younger brother of the more +famous General George Rogers Clark, but for whom the Allegheny +Mountains instead of the Mississippi would have been our western +boundary after the close of the Revolution. He was about thirty-three +years old when he joined Lewis. He possessed excellent qualities, and +it may be said that no two persons could have been selected who were +better fitted to lead the score and a half of men across the continent. + +On July 5, 1803, Captain Lewis left Washington, hoping to gather his +men and materials in time to reach La Charrette, the upper white +settlement on the Missouri, and there spend the winter. The inevitable +delays followed, and the Spanish commandant of the province, not having +received official notice of the transfer, would not allow the +expedition to pass through the territory. The explorers, therefore, +went into camp for the winter at the mouth of the Du Bois River, a +little north of St. Louis, on the eastern bank of the Mississippi. This +point was left on May 14, 1804. Entering the Indian country the leaders +held a council with the Ottoes and Missouris, and by the distribution +of gewgaws and presents won the good will of the red men. Lewis and +Clark named the place of meeting Council Bluff, which is retained to +this day, although the site of the modern city is below the meeting +place and on the opposite, side of the river. + +For a time the expedition acted the part of peacemaker among the +Indians. The officers patched up peace agreements between the tribes +that were on the verge of warfare, and made treaties with the Yankton +branch of the Sioux and the Ricaras. All these natives were familiar +with white men, having known both French traders and the employees of +the British Fur Company. The Indians showed a friendly disposition +toward the explorers, but their wonder was unbounded at sight of the +African servant, he being the first of his race they had ever seen. +With the waggery of his nature this negro gravely informed them that he +was really a wild animal that had been caught and tamed. The simple +folk believed his fantastic yarns, which were emphasized by numerous +feats of strength on his part. + +Progress up the river was slow, because of the many sand bars and +numerous curves of the stream. The hunters, who kept in advance, +secured large quantities of fresh meat, and dried a good deal for the +winter supply. The region of the Mandans was reached in the latter part +of October. There a fort was built and occupied during the winter. This +was in what is now McLean County, North Dakota. The winter was very +severe, and many of the men had their hands and feet frostbitten, while +the continual glare of the snow caused a temporary blindness. + +At this fort another interpreter was engaged. He was a Canadian, whose +wife was a member of the Snake tribe of Indians of the Rocky Mountains. +She was stolen when a child and brought east, where she was bought by +the Canadian, who made her his wife. She was a remarkable woman, and +the only one of her sex who accompanied the party. When she set out she +carried an infant barely two months old. She not only stood the journey +as well as any of the men, but displayed a rare degree of intelligence. +She remembered much of the wild region through which the party had to +pass, and smoothed the way among her own race for the white invaders. +She became very popular with all the members, and deserved the praise +which the leaders gave her. + +Six canoes were soon completed. The company made their start April 7, +1805, sixteen going down stream with a barge laden with curiosities of +the region for President Jefferson, while thirty-two formed the +permanent party, which pressed into the great unknown region spreading +out before them. The names of all these explorers are preserved in the +archives of the War Department under the title of "A roll of the men +who accompanied Captains Lewis and Clark on their late tour to the +Pacific Ocean through the interior of the continent of North America, +showing their rank, with some remarks on their respective merits and +services." + +Early as was the season, the men suffered much from mosquitoes. Spring +kept company with the expedition. Herds of deer, elk, buffaloes and +antelopes were seen grazing on the rich grass, and there seemed no end +to swans and geese. Passing the alkali regions, the party reached, in +the latter part of April, the mouth of a large river, to which they +gave the name of Yellowstone. Joseph Fields, of Kentucky, ascended it +for eight miles, and was the first white man to do so. Rains, high +winds and cold weather welcomed them into the hills of Montana, and +often the boats had to be dragged along the banks by means of elk-skin +cords. They were thus laboriously making their way when, as has been +shown, they were met by Deerfoot and the Shelton brothers at the mouth +of the Musselshell River. + +The story of the Lewis and Clark expedition, therefore, ended for +George and Victor Shelton at the point named. It will not be +uninteresting, however, to sum up the history of one of the most +memorable enterprises connected with the development of the West. +Captains Lewis and Clark gained a great deal of valuable knowledge from +the boys, who had traversed a large part of the region which they +intended to explore. The excellent memories and the marked intelligence +of the youths were admired by the officers. + +A few days after the meeting between the two parties Lewis climbed to +the top of the highest elevation north of the river and gained his +first view of the Rocky Mountains, known at that time as the Stony +Mountains. All the numerous streams were described and named. It has +been charged against the explorers that they were lacking in sentiment +and imagination, for most of the names thus given by them have been +supplanted by others, but it cannot be said that these changes have +always been an improvement. + +On the second day of summer the explorers had to face a puzzling +problem. A large branch flowing from the north was so similar to the +Missouri that it seemed it must be that river, while the one hitherto +accepted as such bore to the south. Which was the branch that, +according to the reports of the Indians, had its rise in the Rocky +Mountains, near the source of the Columbia? To settle the question the +party divided, one ascending either branch. Upon reuniting it was +agreed that the south branch was the real Missouri. The northern stream +was named the Maria. This was another of the few instances in which the +title given by the explorers stuck. + +The rapids five miles below the Falls of the Missouri were reached on +June 15. These had to be passed by a portage. An idea can be formed of +the great difficulties encountered when it is stated that, although the +portage was hardly eighteen miles long, it took eleven days to make it. +The men, however, were in high spirits, and at night Peter Cruzatte +added to the "gayety of nations" by playing on his violin. + +About the middle of August horses were obtained from the tribe from +which the Indian wife of the interpreter had been stolen. The passage +through the mountains or over the Divide caused the greatest suffering +of the expedition. The men had to cut their way in many places through +the brush, clamber over jagged stones and climb such precipitous walls +that several of their horses were crippled. Then snow began falling and +the nights became very cold. Game seemed to have deserted the country, +and the sufferers had to eat all their supply of flour and parched +corn. Beginning with September 14, they were obliged to kill and eat +some of their horses, and even at that had to be very sparing or the +supply would have been exhausted. + +Descending the western side of the mountains, however, they found +abundant edible roots, dried salmon and dried berries at the Indian +villages. The famishing men feasted so ravenously that most of them +became ill. New canoes were constructed, and leaving their horses with +a chief they started down the Clearwater and reached the Columbia on +October 16. Ten days were occupied in making the portage of the falls +and rapids, and on the morning of November 7, when the fog lifted, they +saw in the distance the Pacific Ocean. + +A month later the party went into winter quarters. It rained eternally, +the weather was chilly and their condition for a long time was +miserable in the extreme. The shelter built for themselves was called +Fort Clatsop. There they remained until March 23, 1806, when the +explorers set out on their return journey. They had to face +difficulties, hardships and sufferings again, but they had learned from +experience and were better prepared to do so. They embarked on the +Yellowstone July 24, and ten days later reached its junction with the +Missouri. At this point the men were driven almost frantic by the +mosquitoes. At midday, September 23, 1806, they arrived at St. Louis, +where the whole town turned out to welcome them. There the party was +disbanded, and, passing to their various destinations, the Lewis and +Clark expedition took its place in history. + +During the latter part of the chat between Lewis and Clark, Deerfoot +came quietly forward and sat down beside the Shelton boys. He listened +closely to all that was said. When the officers asked questions, the +Shawanoe left the answers to the brothers. But more than once they were +in doubt, and turned to him for aid. His prompt response in every +instance was noticed by the officers, who, after a time, addressed +their questions almost wholly to him. + +Finally, at a late hour, the visitors wrapped themselves in their +blankets and stretched out on the ground, with their feet turned toward +the blaze. The explorers always maintained a watch, for though they +felt no fear of the Indians they were subject to unpleasant visits, as +in the case when a bison swam a river and went plunging like a steam +engine through the camp. Moreover, the men had seen enough of the +grizzly bear to hold him in respectful awe, and they did not intend to +have any of the brutes steal a march upon them. + +The morning was clear and pleasant, and the explorers were astir at an +early hour. A breakfast was made from catfish and goose, and a cordial +farewell took place. The boys wished Captains Lewis and Clark the best +of fortune, and Lewis complimented them, and especially Deerfoot, for +the information they had given him of the region through which they +expected to force their way. In return, Lewis advised his guests to +bear directly to the south and not to follow the course of the +Missouri, as he and his company had done. In fact, it would have been +absurd for the three to adopt any other plan. They could make no use of +the current because they had no boats, and if they procured them from +the Indians they could not be made to carry the horses. The distance +was much greater by the Lewis and Clark route, which held no +attractions to our friends. When, therefore, Victor Shelton told +Captain Lewis that his advice would be followed, he said that which had +been determined upon before the meeting of the two parties. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + +OVERBOARD. + + +Our friends, after parting with the Lewis and Clark expedition, pressed +southward, in search of a milder climate and a more direct route to +their homes. They were traversing a region broken by many streams, +detached mountain spurs and ranges of lofty elevation. Black Butte, as +it is known to-day, in Dawson County, Montana, was left on the left, +after which they rode through the valley of Little Porcupine Creek to +the Yellowstone, which was crossed with considerable difficulty. +Turning more to the east, they passed the rough, precipitous section, +the scene many years afterward of the appalling Custer massacre, and +now an immense Indian reservation, and, entering the present State of +Wyoming, skirted the foothills of the well-known Big Horn range. Here +the scenery was of the grandest character. Had the party not been +accustomed for months to such impressive exhibitions of the majesty of +nature, they could have spent weeks of enjoyment where the like is +found in few parts of the world. They pushed on, however, not making +what might be termed a real halt until they came to the Laramie +Mountains, almost the equal of the former in picturesque beauty. + +By this time the unremitting hard work began to tell upon the horses. +Zigzag showed slight lameness, and Jack, the animal ridden by George +Shelton, surely needed rest. Only Whirlwind continued as powerful, +active and fresh as ever. Deerfoot and the boys always walked a number +of miles each day, not only for the sake of the horses, but to gain the +exercise each needed. Deerfoot ran races with Whirlwind, who was +inconsiderate enough to beat him every time. Sometimes they frolicked +like a couple of boys. The Shawanoe delighted to tease the noble +creature, who delighted to have him do so. One habit of the youth was +to pretend he was offended with the stallion. He would turn his back +upon him and repel his advances toward a reconciliation. Whirlwind +would poke his nose first over one shoulder and then the other, rubbing +it against the cheek of Deerfoot. If the latter sulked too long, +Whirlwind would show his impatience by flirting his head against that +of the youth, whirling about, kicking up his heels and galloping off. +No words could have said more plainly: + +"I don't care. Pout all you want to. I shan't coax you any more. I +haven't much opinion of you anyway." + +And then Deerfoot had to make peace with his offended majesty. But the +stallion never held off long, and George and Victor laughed at the +antics of the couple. + +The halt of which I have spoken was made one afternoon, near the +southern end of the Laramie range. No more favorable spot could have +been selected, for the grass was abundant and of the best quality. A +stream of considerable size issued from the mountains and flowing +northeast joined the North Platte, a hundred miles away, and there was +enough timber to yield all the fuel needed. The horses were unsaddled +and unbridled, the pack removed from the back of Zigzag and the three +owners were at liberty to do whatever they chose to pass away the +hours. It was so late that they stayed in camp till morning, when it +was decided to set off on a hunt, Deerfoot going by himself, while the +brothers, as usual, kept company. + +There had hardly been a day since parting from Lewis and Clark that our +friends had not seen Indians or signs of them. Sometimes it was the +smoke of their camp fires in the distance, and then they caught sight +of a band of horsemen, who might number three or four or five times as +many warriors. It was the rule of Deerfoot to avoid coming in contact +with these wanderers, so long as he could do so without rousing their +suspicion by his actions. While in a general way the strangers could be +counted upon as friendly, they contained a ratio of lawless if not +desperate characters, who were liable to be tempted by the hope of +plunder. Whirlwind was quite sure to attract envious eyes. Moreover, +the party was now in a region which was visited, more or less, by +trappers and hunters in the employ of fur companies, or who operated +independently. The majority of these men were rough and reckless of the +rights of others. They had little faith in the Golden Rule where +Indians were concerned, and affrays between them and the native +inhabitants were numerous. Many a white man who went into the mountains +never came out again. He fell a victim to his own wrongdoing and +received the fate he had invited so long. Others succeeded in getting +through the lines with their pack animals laden with peltries, to St. +Louis, to return again the following autumn and to face and overcome, +or possibly fail to overcome, the perils they had met so often. + +The sun was shining from a clear, balmy sky, for summer had come, when +Deerfoot swept every portion of the visible horizon with the spyglass +without detecting a sign of red men. To the westward towered the +immense Laramie range, while the plains stretched eastward and were +crossed by numerous streams, on whose banks thriving towns and cities +have been built in later days. Less than a hundred miles to the +southeast was the site of the present city of Cheyenne. + +Before reaching the scene of this encampment the travelers had twice +come within range of grizzly bears. The first was ignored, but the +second did not choose to be passed by in such cavalier fashion. He +first appeared close to camp, much to the terror of the horses, and +then deliberately proceeded to attack everything in sight. He came +within a hair, too, of killing Zigzag and Prince before he was brought +low by the bullets of all three, Deerfoot burying two in the colossal +carcass. + +Black and cinnamon bears were observed, but no disturbance followed on +the part of men or brutes. Several times the wolves, coyotes and pumas +became so troublesome that a number were killed. Bison were so +plentiful that hardly a day passed without sight of them. In some +instances the droves contained tens of thousands. + +George and Victor Shelton soon found themselves climbing among the +foothills. Deerfoot had gone in another direction, the agreement being +that they should return to camp soon after meridian, and not to go far +from headquarters. While none felt misgiving as to danger, all had +learned to be circumspect. + +It may be said that the stroll of the boys was as much to gain exercise +as to hunt game, though the latter object was the one avowed by them. +In those days a person did not have to look far for such sport, but it +seemed as if the wild animals scented the danger and kept out of the +way. When noon came the tired boys sat down beside a mountain torrent, +without either having fired his rifle. + +"We haven't heard the report of Deerfoot's gun," said George, "and I +don't see that there is any use of hunting further." + +"Nor do I. I'm hungry and we shan't be able to get anything to eat this +side of camp. It must be the game noticed that _I_ was with you, and +they have all run to their holes." + +"We have one consolation," remarked George, ignoring the last sentence. +"It will be easier getting back to camp, for it's down hill all the +way." + +"But we shall have a good deal of climbing to do. I'm ready to say I've +gained enough exercise to last me till to-morrow. I think," added +Victor, rising to his feet and looking at the noisy torrent a few feet +in front, "that we can shorten the distance by crossing that." + +"How are we going to do it? We're not likely to find it bridged." + +"I'm sure we shall be able to leap across." + +The two walked to the edge of the stream, which may be described as a +furious torrent, rushing between the rocks, which were separated by a +dozen feet, the upper margin being one or two feet above the surface of +the stream. Standing on the edge of the small canyon and looking down, +the boys saw that the water was of crystalline clearness and was beaten +in many places into froth and foam, which sparkled with every color of +the rainbow as it shot into the sunlight. The course of the torrent was +so tortuous and the turns so abrupt that clouds of mist curled upward +in places and caused the rocks to drip with moisture. The roar was so +loud that the brothers had to shout to each other. + +"We might make a running leap here," said George, "but it isn't worth +while to take the risk." + +"There must be narrower portions. Let's look." + +Turning to the left, they had to go only a little way when they found a +favorable place. The breadth was no more than seven or eight feet. +While they could not shorten the distance to camp very much, the +advantage was worth striving for. + +"No risk in that," remarked Victor, looking at his brother, who nodded +his head to signify he agreed with him. + +"I'll jump first," added Victor, walking back several paces to gain the +necessary start. He could have made the leap without this preparation, +but was using only ordinary prudence. George stood to one side and +close to the edge, so as to observe every phase of the performance. +Despite the apparent safety of the attempt, a strange misgiving came +over George, and he turned to his brother to protest, when he saw he +had started on his brief run. He carried his rifle in his right hand, +took a number of short steps, measuring the distance with his eye, so +that the take-off should be exact, and covered the space in a second or +two. + +George was watching every movement of the supple limbs, when he uttered +an exclamation of horror. At the very moment Victor was gathering his +muscles for the leap, and when close to the edge, the dripping stone +caused his foot to slip. He fell sideways, let go of his rifle, which +shot over the edge, and desperately struggled to check himself. Had +there been five seconds at command he would have been saved. George, +who made the attempt, could have dashed forward and grasped a foot or +leg. Victor could have stopped, but the rock on which he had fallen +seemed to be covered with plumbago. While frantically clutching and +vainly trying to grasp some obstruction that would overcome his +momentum, he slid over the edge and dropped into the boiling cauldron +below. The accident was begun and finished, as may be said, in the +twinkling of an eye. + +Wild with affright, George ran to the edge of the torrent and peered +over. He caught a glimpse of his brother a dozen yards away, spinning +down the torrent. He saw his head for a moment, and then his arms +thrown upward, as he disappeared, blindly but vainly struggling to save +himself. In an instant he was whirled round a bend in the canyon, his +body flung aloft by the resistless force of the torrent, but hurled +hither and thither, as helpless as a log of wood. + +Frantic and hardly conscious of what he was doing, George dashed along +the edge of the canyon, which sped faster than he could run. One moment +he was on the point of leaping into the raging waters in the blind +effort to save Victor, but the certainty that that would only add +another victim held him in restraint, and he continued running, +stumbling and praying in agony for Heaven to intercede while it was yet +time. + +Suddenly he saw a man standing on the other side of the canyon some rods +below, and staring wonderingly at him. George raised his voice so that +it pierced the uproar like the notes of a trumpet: + +"Save him! Save him! He fell into the water!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + +JACK HALLOWAY AGAIN. + + +The man was quick-witted. The words and the frenzied gestures told a +story which he understood. Standing close to the edge of the stream, he +peered into it and caught sight of a white face, loosely flapping limbs +and the helpless drift of a human being, borne toward him with the +speed of a race horse. The top of the bank was so near the surface that +the man dropped on his face, so as to be able to reach forward and +downward to the foaming torrent. + +He saw the body coming, and braced himself for the herculean effort +that would be necessary in the next breath. Reaching so far that he was +in danger of losing his own balance, he coolly awaited the critical +moment. Then his big hand closed like the paw of a grizzly bear on the +shoulder of Victor Shelton. A tremendous wrench and he was dragged out +and dropped limp and senseless at the feet of his rescuer. + +George Shelton saw this much, and, hardly knowing what he was doing, +made a desperate effort to leap the chasm, that he might join the +couple. But his foot slipped, too, and only by a superhuman effort did +he save himself from tumbling into the swirling wrath of water. +Scrambling to his feet, he sped downward to Victor and the stranger. +The latter showed his coolness by getting to work without the least +delay. Victor was senseless and had swallowed a good deal of water. He +seemed to be drowned. + +The man held him by the heels and was standing him on his head. Then he +rolled him over and pressed his chest, with that oscillation which is +helpful in restoring seemingly drowned persons, while the breathless +George stood idly by watching everything with straining eyes. He could +do nothing but pray and hope. + +At the end of a minute or two he saw, with joy unspeakable, the signs +of returning life. Victor was on his back, as if dead, when he partly +opened his eyes; but there was no expression in them. His rescuer was +scrutinizing the lad's face and noted the awakening of consciousness. +Straightening up, he said with a sigh: + +"He's all right now; but he couldn't have come nigher pegging out." + +"You have saved him! You have saved him! Oh, how can I thank you?" + +And yielding to the reaction, George sobbed like a child. The stranger +looked at him without speaking, and gave his attention again to the +prostrate form. Victor speedily regained his senses, and, with a little +help from the man, sat up. He stared wonderingly at his new friend and +then at his brother, striving manfully to master his emotions. With the +waggery that cropped up at the most unexpected times, he turned to +George with the question: + +"Are you crying because he saved my life?" + +"I'm crying for joy. I had given up all hope." + +"So had I. I tell you I came pretty near being a goner. Please help me +up." + +George took his hand and almost lifted Victor to his feet. As he came +up he made a grimace, because of the pain that wrenched him. He was so +battered and bruised that the wonder was that several bones had not +been broken. + +"Where's my rifle?" suddenly asked Victor, looking about him. + +"In the bottom of the canyon, I reckon." + +"Mebbe you'd like to make a dive for it," suggested the man. + +"No, I've had enough of that. How shall I thank you for what you have +done?" + +"By not saying anything about it. By a piece of good luck I happened to +be on the spot in time to give you a lift." + +The boys now looked more closely at the Good Samaritan. He was attired +in the dress common among the trappers and hunters of the Northwest in +those days, and was a magnificent specimen of physical manhood, being +fully six feet in height, with a broad, massive frame and an immense +grizzled beard, which flowed over his chest and covered his face almost +to the eyes. He had laid down his long, formidable rifle when he +hurried to the rescue of the boy, and he now stooped and picked up the +weapon. Moving back a few paces, so as to get beyond the noise made by +the rushing waters, he said, in his gruff but not unpleasant voice: + +"Tell me how this thing happened." + +George briefly gave the particulars of the mishap, to which the man +silently listened. + +"You ain't the only younker or man either who has lost all by a little +slip. The next time you want to make a big jump be sure of your +footing. What are you two chaps doing in this part of the world?" + +"We have been across the continent, almost to the Pacific, and are now +on the way to our home in Ohio." + +"You ain't traveling alone, are you?" + +"No; we have a companion, who is off somewhere in the mountains, but +will soon join us in camp." + +"'Pears to me you've been on a powerful long tramp." + +"We have. We spent last winter among the Blackfeet, and are homesick." + +"I reckon your camp ain't fur off, and we may as well go there." + +"We shall be glad to have you with us, for you have proved the best of +friends." + +"Thar! Thar! Drop that; talk about something else." + +When Victor tried to walk he had to lean on the shoulder of his +brother, and the pain from his bruises compelled him at times to stop +and rest. The burly trapper offered to help, but Victor thanked him and +got on quite well with the assistance of George. The man walked a few +paces behind the two, that he might not hurry them too much, and +because it belonged to the boys to act as guide. + +"Who is the man you've got with you?" + +"He is a young Shawanoe Indian named Deerfoot," replied George Shelton. + +"What!" exclaimed the trapper, stopping as if shot. "Do you mean that +handsome young warrior who went through the country below us last +summer with a Blackfoot redskin and two younkers?" + +"The same. We are the boys that were with him." + +"Wal, I'll be skulped!" added the other, as if he could not do justice +to his feelings. "I never dreamed of anything like _that_." + +"Like what?" asked George. + +"Seeing that Shawanoe agin. Say, he's a great one, ain't he?" + +"You know him, then?" + +"Wal, I reckon. He done me the greatest favor of my life--greater than +what I done that chap of yourn a little while ago." + +"I don't see how that can be," remarked the limping Victor; "but +Deerfoot is always doing good to others." + +"Didn't he ever tell you anything about me?" + +"You haven't told us your name." + +"I'm Jack Halloway." + +The boys agreed that they had never heard the Shawanoe mention him by +name. Victor added: + +"He is the last one to speak of his good deeds, and he doesn't like to +hear anyone else speak of them." + +"He'll hear some one talk when I see him," chuckled the trapper, with a +shaking of his herculean shoulders. + +Because of Victor's hurts the descent among the foothills to camp took +a long time, and the afternoon was well gone when the three reached +headquarters. While a little way off the three caught sight of the +Shawanoe, who had started a fire and was broiling buffalo steak for +supper. He looked with surprise at the sight of Victor leaning on the +shoulder of his brother and walking with difficulty, and at the +towering form behind them. Ceasing his work, he came forward to greet +the party. He paid no attention to the man until George Shelton told of +the mishap in which the life of Victor was saved by the person behind +them. + +During this brief interchange the trapper kept in the background, with +his eyes on the Shawanoe. Needless to say, Deerfoot had recognized him +at the first glance. Not suspecting this, the man now came forward, the +moving of the beard about his mouth showing that he was grinning and +chuckling. + +"I reckon you don't remember me, Deerfoot." + +"Deerfoot could never forget his brother, Jack Halloway," replied the +youth, extending his hand, which was warmly grasped by the trapper. + +"I'm powerful glad to meet you agin, Shawanoe, though I hadn't much +hope of ever doing so. Talk about friends, you beat 'em all, and I'll +be skulped if you don't look handsomer than ever--no you don't, for +that couldn't be. Shake agin, pardner." + +Deerfoot was as pleased to meet his old acquaintance as the latter was +to see him. All seated themselves on the ground about the blaze, and as +night had not yet come the meal was deferred until more was learned of +what had taken place during the interval between the former meeting and +the present coming together. + +"Why is my brother in the mountains at this season of the year?" asked +Deerfoot, when the trapper had lit his pipe. + +Of course cold weather is the time for trapping fur-bearing animals. +The custom in the olden days was for the hunters to go into the +mountains in the autumn, spend the time until spring in gathering +peltries, and then bring them to civilization for sale. It was now +summer, and it was not to be supposed that Jack Halloway was engaged on +professional business in the Laramie Mountains. He explained: + +"Last fall I took a partner--Dick Burley by name--and we put in the +winter among the beaver runs and mountains over to the northwest. We +done so poor that I let Dick start with the pack animals for St. Louis, +without me going with him. He hadn't more than half a load, and we made +up our minds that we'd got to find new trapping grounds or we shouldn't +make enough to pay for our salt. So me and Dick parted and I've been on +the tramp for two months." + +"How did you make out?" asked Victor, who, having found an easy +position for his aching body, felt it his duty to join in the +discussion. + +"I hit it when I came to this part of the country. A few miles south +are hundreds of beaver, foxes, otter and other critters whose furs +we're after. I don't think a single one of 'em has ever been trapped. +There's where me and Dick will try it next fall." + +"Then you will soon go home?" + +"I intended to start to-morrow. My horse is a little way back among the +foothills, stuffing himself with enough grass to last him a week." + +"My brother will go with us," said the pleased Deerfoot. + +"If you don't feel too proud to have me for company, I'll be mighty +glad to go with you." + +"Nothing will suit us better," said George, heartily. It was natural +that he and Victor should feel profoundly grateful to the trapper. Even +had he not done them so measureless a service they would have liked him +from the first. + +It was not until the night had fully come, the evening meal eaten and +the fire replenished, though the weather remained mild, that a full +interchange took place among the different members of the little party. +Victor suffered less from his bruises, and with his blanket wrapped +about his shoulders showed no effects from his terrifying adventure. +The horses were left to themselves, Jack Halloway saying that no +attention need be given to his, despite the possibility of some +thieving Indian making off with him. The trapper expressed unbounded +admiration of Whirlwind, and could not understand how Deerfoot had ever +gained such a piece of property. George and Victor did not dare to +explain in the presence of the Shawanoe, but each determined to do so +on the first opportunity, despite the risk of another "disciplining" at +the hands of the modest youth. + +After Jack had smoked awhile and the chat had gone on without any +special point, he turned to the Shawanoe and said: + +"I've seen you stealing a look at me now and then and I know what you +done it for." + +"Yes, Deerfoot did so; but my brother cannot tell the reason." + +"You've been trying to find out from my looks whether I've stuck to the +pledge I made you a year ago to give up drinking whiskey." + +"That was the reason; Deerfoot was almost but not quite certain." + +"Have you any doubts left?" + +The Shawanoe smiled. + +"Only a shadow." + +"Wal, you can kick that shadow out of sight! I haven't drank a drop of +the stuff since that night, a year ago, when I flung my flask into the +creek, after hearing your sermon, that shook me down to my toes." + +Deerfoot leaned over and offered his hand again to happy Jack Halloway, +who turned to the boys. + +"Being as he never told you, I might as well give you the story." + +Thereupon the trapper related in his characteristic fashion the +incident of which you heard long ago. The eyes of the boys kindled and +Victor said: + +"That is only one of a hundred things Deerfoot has done." + +Catching a warning look from the Shawanoe, Victor said in desperation: + +"I'm not going to try to give a list, Deerfoot, but won't you let me +tell Jack how you whipped the greatest war chief of the Blackfeet and +how he became a Christian?" + +"There is no need of that, but my brothers may tell what happened to +them when they disobeyed Deerfoot." + +"I'll do that if you don't shut down on the other story." + +The Shawanoe would have refused, but the trapper's curiosity had been +stirred and he insisted upon hearing of the incident. As a compromise +the Indian youth rose to his feet and sauntered out to where Whirlwind +was still cropping the juicy herbage. He would not stay and listen to +what he knew was about to be said. The boys were glad to have him +absent, for it left them free to speak what they pleased, and you may +be sure that Victor and George did not mince matters. Their account of +that remarkable combat and its results was told with graphic eloquence. +Then George added the story of Deerfoot's encounter with the grizzly +bear and his defeat of the Assiniboine, whose life he spared. Inasmuch +as the boys had never been able to draw the particulars of that combat +from Deerfoot, Victor had to embellish it with his own imagination, and +he did it to perfection. He was in the midst of a description of how +the Shawanoe beat the best marksmen, runners and leapers of the +Blackfeet when Deerfoot came back to the camp fire. + +"Now let my brothers tell of what happened to them when Deerfoot was +through with Taggarak." + +"You needn't worry; I didn't forget that. Well, Jack, you see Deerfoot +forbade me and George to come anywhere near, but we couldn't stay away. +He found it out, cut a big gad and splintered it over our shoulders and +we couldn't help ourselves." + +And then Jack Halloway threw back his head and roared with laughter, +declaring that he had never heard so good a story. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + +A TEMPERANCE AGITATOR. + + +"I'll never forget that ride home last year," said Jack Halloway, +"after I pulled out in the night and left Deerfoot with you younkers +asleep by the camp fire. It took me a week to reach St. Louis, and +there wasn't a drop of whiskey to be had on the road. For two or three +days I was the most miserable critter that ever limped on two legs. I'd +have give my whole load of peltries to get that flask back agin, but +there was no help for it. Twice I rode up to the camp fires of Injins, +hoping to buy some fire water from them, but neither party had a drop. +Then I buckled down to it. + +"On the fourth night when I camped I was almost crazy. As I rolled +about in my blanket, not able to sleep a wink, I remembered what +Deerfoot had said to me about praying. Strange I'd never thought of it +before. Wal, I got on my knees, and if ever a poor wretch prayed it was +Jack Halloway, and I kept it up for two or three hours. I was about +ready to let go when _the thing which I was praying for came to me!_ + +"Just as plain as I have heard your voices, I catched the words, 'It's +all right; you've conquered your temptation; you're boss now.' Some +folks may laugh, but it won't do for 'em to say where Jack Halloway can +hear 'em that thar's nothing in the Christian religion. I know better, +'cause I've got it right there!" exclaimed the trapper, thumping his +heart. + +"From that time forward everything was rosy with me. The sun never +shone so bright, the birds never sung so sweet and I never felt so +happy through and through. I shouted and yelled for joy and walloped +the horses, just because I couldn't help it. If I had met anyone at +those times he would have set me down as drunk. So I was--drunk with +pure joy and religion. + +"At St. Louis I sold my peltries for the biggest price I've got in ten +years. I took the money home and throwed it into the lap of my little, +sweet, gray-haired mother, who just stared at me, not knowing what it +meant. When I made it all clear she began crying, and then she dropped +on her knees and I dropped alongside of her, and when she got through +praying I took up the job and kept things humming for another half +hour. After I'd let up I grabbed her in my arms, and we danced about +that cabin, just as she used to do when she was the belle of the town, +and we laughed and frolicked and made a couple of fools of ourselves. + +"When she asked me to tell her the meaning of my short rein-up and +change of my life, I give her the whole thing. It was the work of a +young Shawanoe Injin called Deerfoot, who was the most ginooine +Christian on either side of the old Mississippi. She asked all about +you, Deerfoot, and she said she hoped she would meet you some day. So +when we get back to St. Louis I'll introduce you." + +"Deerfoot will be glad to see the mother of my brother," softly replied +the Shawanoe, in a voice tremulous with feeling. He and the boys +listened with absorbed interest to the graphic story told by the +trapper. + +"French Pete keeps the worst whiskey hole along the Mississippi. It is +down by the river side and is the main drinking place in the town. He +has got hundreds of dollars from the families of the trappers who come +down the river in the spring, and for years he has gathered in about +every cent I could rake together. + +"Wal, after I had been home about a week I strolled down to his place +one moonlight night. I told mother not to worry about me, for I would +blow my own head off before I'd ever swaller another drop of red +p'ison. When I opened the door of the ramshackle cabin, Pete looked up +with a grin, and said as how he was wondering where I'd kept myself so +long, for he had heerd I'd got back and done unusual well. He was glad +to welcome me, and asked what I'd have and the treat was on him for old +friendship's sake. + +"There didn't happen to be anybody else in the place at the time, for +it was early in the evening. I walked up to the bar and leaned on it +familiar like, and asked Pete if he didn't think he'd made enough money +in ruining other folks to quit the bus'ness. He showed he didn't know +what I meant by the strange question. I then said I'd stopped the +foolery for good, and give him my opinion of him as the worst wretch in +town. He had sot out the whiskey bottle on the bar and shoved out the +cork with his thumb and forefinger. I 'spose that was to let me get a +whiff of the stuff. I got it. I reached out my hand, pushed the cork +back in the bottle, and then grabbing it by the neck brought it down on +the bar with a bang that broke it into a dozen pieces and sent the +whiskey flying about the room. + +"When Pete seed what I was up to he made a swipe at me, remarking +several swear words at the same time, but I landed him one under the +ear that sent him back so hard aginst the bottles behind him that he +bounced forward agin, and I grabbed him. + +"He made just the sort of club I wanted. You see I had him by the +shoulders and I could swing his heels free and easy like. Wal, I used +him that way. For the next ten or fifteen minutes the only music in +that place was the panting of Pete and the crash and smash of bottles. +The fumes of the stuff filled the room like the mist you sometimes see +rising from a kenyon in the mountains. When I got through I don't +believe there was a whole bottle left, and as I stepped about the floor +I splashed in whiskey, just as we do when the Mississippi overflows the +streets. I tossed Pete over into one corner, and, not seeing any more +blessed work to do, passed out the door. I met two friends on their way +for a drink. When they said good evening I remarked off-hand that +they'd find plenty of whiskey inside without asking for it, and went on +to my home. + +"I expected Pete would make a row about what I'd done and I would be +catched in the biggest kind of a row, but there ain't much law in St. +Louis just now, on account of the change from Spanish rule to French +and then to American. Besides, Pete hasn't got many friends, and I +reckon he knew he wouldn't get much sympathy. He rigged up his place +after awhile and laid in a new stock of p'ison, but it'll take a long +time for him to make up the losses that follered his inviting Jack +Halloway to have a drink. Shawanoe," added the trapper, abruptly +turning to the Indian, "I want to ask you a question." + +"Deerfoot will be glad to answer if he can." + +"When I went down to French Pete's place and smashed things and cleaned +it out, as I've been stating, did I do right?" + +Instead of directly answering, the Shawanoe asked: + +"Has the conscience of my brother ever whispered to him that he did +wrong in breaking the whiskey bottles?" + +"No, I rather think it's the other way. When I started home I felt my +conscience clapping me on the shoulder and saying, 'You hit it right +that time, old fellow,' and ever since, when I think of it, I hear the +same soft words." + +There was a twinkle in the eyes of Deerfoot as he gently replied: + +"My brother should always do what his conscience tells him to do." + +"Good! That settles it! But I've got something more interesting than +all that to tell you. If French Pete didn't do anything to me for what +I'd done to him, he laid a deep plan to get his revenge. You see he's +afraid to tackle me in the open, for I may say there ain't a man living +that Jack Halloway is afeard of--barring one." + +"Who is he?" asked Victor Shelton, slyly nudging his brother. + +"Deerfoot the Shawanoe." + +The face of the Indian flushed and he protested: + +"Deerfoot would be only a pappoose in the hands of my brother." + +"P'raps, but you'd never be in his hands. I've studied your build and +quickness, and the chap that can whip a Blackfoot war chief without +using a weapon is the best fellow in the world to let alone--I beg +pardon, Deerfoot. I'll drop it. + +"When it was getting time for me to think about going to the beaver +runs agin Dick Burley come to me and proposed that we should be +pardners. Dick is a good fellow and I always liked him, for he hasn't a +streak of yaller in his make-up. The only objection to him was that he +liked firewater too well. He spent enough money at French Pete's to +support that rogue. Dick's wife and two children were in rags, and the +poor woman had to work herself almost to death to keep from starving. I +had talked with Dick many times, not neglecting to give him a good +cussing now and then, but it didn't amount to nothing. In the hope of +being able to do him good I agreed to go with him to the Northwest. + +"Wal, you wouldn't 'spicion what a trick French Pete and Dick was +trying to play on me. It was the idea of Pete, but Dick promised to do +his part. Pete agreed to let Dick have a whole keg of his best--or +rather worst--whiskey without charging him a cent. He was to take it +with us, with the sole purpose of getting me into the habit of drinking +again. Their ca'clation was that when we got away up in the Northwest, +where it was sometimes cold enough to freeze the tail off a brass +monkey, and Dick took his swigs reg'lar like, I'd be sure to knock +under and jine him. I couldn't stand it to see him enj'ying such bliss +and telling what a lot of good it done him. + +"I never spicioned anything of the kind, but when I set eyes on that +keg stored among the things on our pack horses I fixed _my_ plan of +campaign. Being as it was meant to last four or five months-it wouldn't +do for Dick to draw on it too heavy at the start. Then, too, as I said, +he expected me to come in on the chorus, and he was saving up for that +glad day. + +"Every time Dick took a drink, which I must say waren't often, of +course he invited me to jine, but when I said no, that was enough and +he let me alone. Oh, he was shrewd, and was playing his cards like a +boss of the game. + +"Wal, we had only one brush with the Injins, and we got to the place we +had fixed on without any harm, and with most of the whiskey still in +the keg. It was where I had been doing my trapping for several years +before I went further South, which was the reason I happened to meet +you in that part of the world last summer. + +"We set our traps as usual, turned our horses out to grass and stowed +our blankets and things in a big holler tree, in which I had cut a +door, with a buffalo skin that hung down in front. The first thing Dick +carried in was the whiskey keg. 'I think more of that,' he remarked, as +he sot it down tender like, as if it was a sick baby, 'than everything +else in the outfit.' I made no reply, but I was busy thinking, and when +he wa'nt looking I done some chuckling and laughing that would have +made him open his eyes had he knowed of it. + +"One night when Dick was sleeping particular sound I sneaked out of the +holler tree with the keg. I had to be powerful careful, for we folks +larn to sleep light, but I managed it without waking him. Having made +up my mind long before what I would do, I didn't make any mistake. +Raising the cask, with the stuff jingling and sploshing about inside, I +brought it down on the p'int of a rock with a force that made it split +open like a watermelon. In a few minutes every drop had soaked into the +ground and it was a thousand miles to French Pete in St. Louis. + +"I had to tell Dick the truth the next morning. The minute he opened +his eyes he went for his morning dram. I remarked that we didn't need +whiskey in them parts, and being as I had become a temperance man it +was agin my principles to have any of the p'ison around. + +"Wal, Dick was that mad he turned white. When he realized that there +was no way of his getting a drink for months he collapsed. Then he +roused up and said as how the insult, being a mortal one, we'd have to +settle it outside. I was looking for something of that kind and replied +that I was agreeable. + +"Dick's idea was that we should use our knives and to keep to it till +one was killed or he hollered 'Enough!' which neither of us would do to +save his life. I said the best plan would be to use our fists. A duel +with knives was liable to be over sudden, while a fist-fight would last +much longer, and therefore give both more enjoyment. It wouldn't be any +trouble for him as got the upper hand to pound the other to death, and +being as the whole thing would be in doubt till it was over, the +advantage in the way of real happiness was obvious. + +"After some argument Dick seed the p'int, and agreed, and we went at +it. Wal, I needn't dwell on the partic'lars. Dick put up a stiff fight, +and might have give me a good deal of trouble if it hadn't been that he +was weakened by whiskey, while I had long got rid of the effects of the +last drop. He had to knock under, and when he found the only way to +save himself was to yell 'Enough!' he done it, though, as I said, he +would have held out if he had been using knives. + +"I rested from pummeling him, but told him he couldn't get up till he +had told the Lord what a mean scamp he was and had asked His +forgiveness and promised to try to live a Christian. Dick wasn't +expecting anything like that, and he b'iled over with rage. But it did +no good, and I banged him agin, good and hard, and told him I never +would stop till he knocked under. + +"I had to soothe him a good while before he give in. He said he would +do as I wished and then I let him up. He wanted to wait till night, but +I wouldn't allow it, and he went down on his knees and sailed in. I +made him pray out loud, so as to be sure he put things in right shape. +Now, Deerfoot, tell me whether I managed _that_ job right." + +The Shawanoe was puzzled, for the trapper had submitted a new phase of +the most interesting question to him. But Deerfoot was shrewd. + +"Let my brother finish his story." + +"Oh, the job came out all right. Dick was sulky and ugly for a few +days, though I made him stick to his prayers every morning and night. +But bye and bye, when the whiskey got out of him, he begun to improve. +One day he laughed, but was so scared by it that he didn't speak till +night. Soon after that he told me he felt a good deal better, which the +same I replied was because he was getting over the long drunk he had +been on for a dozen years. + +"Wal, Dick continued to improve. His spirits rose, his appetite was +stronger, he could stand more work, and I noticed that in praying he +yelled louder than ever. All these was good signs and showed that I had +managed the bus'ness right, so I won't ask your opinion on my style, +Deerfoot. + +"Then Dick told me of the job that French Pete and him had put up on +me. I could afford to laugh, but Dick was that mad that he was eager to +get back to St. Louis, so that he could go down to Pete's place and +smash things as I done. But I talked him out of that, and he promised +me he wouldn't undertake the bus'ness till I could jine him. You know +there's a sweetness about such work that I 'spose made me selfish. I +warn't willing he should have all the enj'yment to himself. + +"I've showed my faith in Dick by sending him home with the peltries. +You see it isn't like a chap trying to make a man of himself when the +temptation is at his elbow. Dick had to go without for months, and that +give him enough time to become master of himself. All that I'm afeard +of is that he'll get impatient when he catches sight of French Pete's +place and forget his promise to me." + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + +"GOOD-BYE." + + +The remainder of the homeward journey was without special incident. It +was several days before Victor Shelton fully recovered from the +pounding caused by his fall into the torrent. The loss of his rifle was +keenly felt, but he did not fret, for it would have been ungrateful +after his marvelous escape. + +Jack Halloway's spirits were irrepressible, and his good nature was +like so much sunshine. The only fault to be found with him was his +inclination to burst into song, without waiting for urging on the part +of his friends. He was gifted with a tremendous voice, but +unfortunately he had no more idea of a tune than a grizzly bear. But no +one could criticize the fellow, who was the life of the little party. + +The course of our friends was southeast, leading through the present +States of Wyoming, Colorado and into Kansas, where they struck the +trail of the year before. This was followed across Missouri, and, +without mishap, all four reached in due time that old French town on +the Mississippi. + +Deerfoot and the boys stayed there for one night and a part of a day. +It was a visit which they always remembered. The only fly in the +ointment was the discovery by Jack Halloway that Dick Burley, after +all, had broken his promise. He had not been in St. Louis twenty-four +hours when he sauntered down to French Pete's place. That worthy met +him with a grin, supposing he had come to make his report, whose nature +was not doubted. Then Dick, after denouncing the fellow as he deserved, +proceeded to business in as emphatic a fashion as Jack had done the +preceding year. He was equally thorough, perhaps more so, for he not +only left the place a wreck, and the proprietor senseless, but "laid +out" two brawlers who happened to be present and were imprudent enough +to try to help the landlord. + +"I've one hope," said Jack, in telling of the incident. "Pete will +start up agin and then it'll be _my_ turn to make a friendly call on +him." + +In that humble home, on the upper margin of the straggling town of St. +Louis, Jack Halloway introduced George and Victor Shelton and Deerfoot +to his mother. She was a sprightly little lady, who could not have +weighed a hundred pounds, and whose soft, wavy, white hair and pink +cheeks and regular features spoke of the unusual beauty that was hers +when she was the belle of the town. She had a serene beauty and +winsomeness that warmed the hearts of the callers from the moment they +first saw her. + +As soon as the introductions and greetings were over, Jack caught his +mother in his arms and tossed her as high as the ceiling would permit, +catching her as she descended and kissing her as if she were a little +child. Then, waving the others to seats, he dropped into the single +rocking chair and held her on his knee during the conversation that +followed. Her soul was wrapped up in this massive boy with the strength +of a giant, and her happiness over his restoration to her after her +years of prayer had a pathos and sweetness that nothing else in all the +world could give. + +When the chatter had gone on for a few minutes Jack drew his mother's +face down beside his own and whispered: + +"Did you ever see as handsome a chap as that young Indian sitting over +there in the corner? Look how modest he is, as if he didn't wish to be +noticed. Didn't you remember, when I told you his name is Deerfoot, +that he's the chap that made me throw away my flask of whiskey and was +the cause of my becoming a _man_?" + +"No," replied the astonished parent, "I didn't recall it. I must have a +talk with him before he leaves us." + +It was arranged after supper that George and Victor should go to the +home of Dick Burley to sleep. Room could have been made for them in the +cabin of Jack Halloway by letting the three rest on the floor, and he +and his mother would have been pleased; but the brothers showed good +taste by accepting the invitation of Burley, at whose house, for the +first time in many months, they slept in a bed. There was happy content +in that home also, for what loving, devoted wife is not thankful when +her husband is restored to her and is in his right mind? + +That humble home where Jack Halloway smoked his pipe, with his mother +knitting beside him and Deerfoot a little way off in his chair, was the +picture of serene, grateful pleasure on the cool summer night, long +ago, when the three sat in converse. + +The youth was so drawn to the pure, sweet-faced, motherly lady that he +could not refuse her request to tell her about himself. He talked more +freely than was his wont, and said many things he would not have said +in the presence of others. She penetrated the nobility of the youth, +who could read and write well, whose mind was stored with considerable +knowledge, whose woodcraft approached as near perfection as mortal man +can attain, and whose strength, skill and prowess (as she gathered from +incidents brought out in the course of the evening) were the superior +of any person's whom she had ever seen. In addition, as she said to her +son the next day, anyone would be tempted to talk to Deerfoot, because +it was such a pleasure to look upon the handsome countenance and to +make him smile and show his beautiful teeth. + +So it was that Deerfoot was compelled to tell the whole story of his +encounter with Taggarak, with its remarkable sequel; of his fight with +the grizzly bear, and his conquest of Whirlwind, the peerless stallion. +He never would have done this but for the persistent questioning of +Mrs. Halloway. The boys had told Jack enough on the long ride from the +mountains to St. Louis for him to give his mother the necessary +pointers, and he helped her in driving the Shawanoe into a corner, +where he could not otherwise extricate himself. + +The wonderful thing in the estimation of the good woman was that the +hero of these and many other exploits was a _Christian_. She had never +seen one of his race who professed to be a follower of the Meek and +Lowly One, though she had heard of such from the missionaries; but she +agreed with her son that no more perfect exemplar of Christianity was +to be found anywhere. + +On the morrow, when the time came to part, Mrs. Halloway took the hand +of Deerfoot in her dainty palm, and in a trembling voice thanked him +for what he had done for her through what he did for her son. She +promised to pray for him every day of her remaining life, and while he +stood trying to keep back the tears she added: + +"Please bend your head a little." + +He bent down and she touched her lips to his forehead, and, still +holding the hand, said so that all, Jack, the Shelton boys and Dick +Burley, could hear, as they gathered round to say the parting words: + +"Well done, good and faithful servant!" + +The benison thus bestowed remained with Deerfoot all the way home and +to the end of his life. In the cool depths of the forest, amid the +fragrance of brown leaves, the bark of trees and of bursting bud and +blossom, and by the flow of the crystal brook, he heard the gentle +whisper. It came to him when the snow sifted against his frame and the +bite of the Arctic blast was as merciless as the fangs of the she-wolf. +Above the crash of the hurricane that uprooted and splintered the +century-old monarchs of the woods the words rang out like the notes of +an angel's trumpet, and in the watches of the night, under the +star-gleam or in the fleecy moonlight, while stillness brooded over a +sleeping world, the music swung back and forth like a censer through +the corridors of the soul, with a sweetness that told him the strings +of the harp throbbed under the touch of the fingers of God himself. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. + +RETROSPECT.[2] + + +"I am the son and only child of Taggarak, a leading war chief for many +years of the Blackfoot Indians. I had an elder brother, but he died +before reaching manhood. I remember the visit made by Deerfoot the +Shawanoe to our tribe, in the autumn and winter of 1804 and 1805. He +came from Ohio, in company with two brothers named Shelton, that were +white, and with Mul-tal-la, who belonged to our own people, and had +made the journey eastward into the Shawanoe country. Mul-tal-la had a +companion when he left us, but he was accidentally killed after +arriving in the East. + +"I was not quite five years old when I first saw Deerfoot and his two +friends, yet I can never forget him, for he was the most remarkable +youth, white or red, that I ever met." + + [2] Statement of Ap-pa-pa-alk, a member of the Blackfoot tribe, + given to Rev. J. Y. Dilworthy, missionary, on the 21st of + October, 1869. + +(Here follows a description of Deerfoot's appearance, his traits, his +skill with rifle and bow, his athletic prowess and his unequaled +woodcraft. This need not be repeated, since you are familiar with it. +The statement which follows, however, is one of the most remarkable +ever penned.) + +"I was in the Big Lodge on the afternoon Deerfoot spoke to many of our +people of the white man's God, who, he said, was the God of the red man +as well. Young as I was, I stood at the knee of my mother, thrilled and +almost breathless under the spell of the simple eloquence of the +Shawanoe, many of whose words I remember. In the midst of his address +my father, Chief Taggarak, strode into the lodge. He passed so close to +me that his knee brushed my shoulder. My mother and I looked up at him, +but he did not see us, nor did he notice anyone except Deerfoot. His +eyes were fixed on the young Shawanoe, and we all thought he meant to +attack him. + +"Deerfoot saw him enter, stopped speaking and looked steadily at the +chief as he drew near. Deerfoot always carried his knife at his girdle, +though of course he had laid aside his gun. I remember wondering why he +did not draw his weapon, but, instead of doing so, he placed his hands +behind his back and calmly surveyed Taggarak, without the least sign of +fear. From what I afterward learned, I am sure that if my father had +attacked the Shawanoe, the chief would have been quickly overcome, if +not killed. + +"Within two paces of Deerfoot, Taggarak wheeled about, _faced_ his +people and made an impassioned avowal of his belief in the Christian +religion. He declared that the true God had spoken to him when he tried +to hide himself in the woods and to close his ears against His words. +That God had not allowed him to sleep or eat or drink or rest till he +threw himself on his face, and with streaming eyes begged Him to +forgive and take him into His favor. + +"Never was there such excitement among the Blackfoot tribe as was +caused by the declaration of their greatest war chief that he had +become a Christian. It almost rent the tribe in twain. We had a number +of villages and different chiefs, but Taggarak was the greatest of them +all. + +"It was clear to everyone that he looked upon Deerfoot the Shawanoe as +more than an ordinary human being. In truth I thought and still think +the same, and I believe you will agree with me when you hear the rest +of my story. Taggarak asked Deerfoot whether he should give up his +chieftaincy, and was ready to do whatever the Shawanoe advised. +Deerfoot told him to remain chief as long as he lived, but to be +merciful to his enemies, never to fight except in defence of his home +and people, and to pray to God morning and night and to do all he could +to please Him in his actions, his words and his thoughts. Deerfoot did +much in the way of teaching him, and Taggarak became a Christian, as +did my mother and myself and others of our tribe, though I never +understood all the height and depth and breadth of God's love and plans +until I had grown to manhood and talked with the missionaries. + +"Christianity would have been firmly planted among my people but for +the acts of the white men themselves. When the expedition of Lewis and +Clark came through our country one of them killed a Blackfoot. No doubt +there was some justification for the act, but it made our tribe the +enemies of the white men, and many who professed to love the God of the +palefaces now cast away such love and would have none of it. Taggarak +was much grieved and indignant over the action of the white men, but +nothing could weaken or shake his faith in Christianity." + +(The incident alluded to occurred July 27, 1806. A party of Blackfeet +stole a number of horses belonging to Lewis and Clark's party, were +pursued, and one of the Indians killed and another wounded. The tribe +was so embittered toward the whites that they were treacherous enemies +to them for many years afterward.) + +"From the year following this sad event, however, the authority of +Taggarak waned. He did not care for power, and was content to let it +slip gradually from him and pass to others. I could have become chief +had I wished it, but I knew I was distrusted because I professed +Christianity, and the Blackfeet and I thought so differently about +everything that I remained a simple warrior, content to serve my father +and mother, as an obedient son. + +"I did not know for years of the encounter between Taggarak and +Deerfoot in the wood, when the chief sought his life, but was overcome +and then spared by the Shawanoe. Deerfoot never spoke of it, and I was +almost grown when my father told my mother and me of the strange +incident, which was the means of the chief's accepting the religion +that the youth taught by word and example. + +"When Deerfoot left our village, Taggarak begged him to visit him +again. He urged so hard that the youth said he would do so if he could, +but he saw little hope and thought their next meeting would have to +wait till both passed into the hunting grounds above. + +"Taggarak meditated much over the coming of Deerfoot. As he grew older +he often went to the elevation, a little way from our village, and near +where he had been overcome by the Shawanoe, and passed hours gazing +toward the East, looking and hoping for sight of the youth who did not +come. He always went alone to the spot and did not suspect his action +was noticed by anyone. But at the request of my mother, I stealthily +followed the chief. He seated himself on a broad, flat rock, which gave +him a view of many miles of mountain, wood and stream, and it seemed +that for the hour I watched him he never took his gaze from the point +in the sky where the sun first showed itself. I have sometimes wondered +whether my father mistook any approaching warrior for the Shawanoe. I +never learned, for not once did he ever refer to those lonely visits to +the elevation. + +"One day my father said, with his old sternness of manner, that since +Deerfoot was not coming to see him, I must take a message to the +Shawanoe in his distant home. It was a startling command, but was not +unwelcome to me. I had heard much of the white man's country, and knew +the palefaces were fast pushing into our own. I had listened to +Mul-tal-la's wonderful stories times without number, and often resolved +that when an opportunity came I should visit the white towns and +settlements. + +"I was glad, therefore, when my father spoke as he did, and still more +glad when Mul-tal-la, although he had a wife and two children, offered +to go with me. He was anxious to see Deerfoot and the acquaintances he +had made many years before, whose memory was always a pleasure to him. + +"My father's message to the Shawanoe amounted to little. I was to tell +him the chief was still true to his faith, and to ask him whether he +could come to the chief, and, if he could not, whether he still +remembered Taggarak. That was all. + +"I was a grown man when, with Mul-tal-la as my companion, I rode down +from the Blackfoot country and we set out on the long journey he had +made more than twenty years before. He remembered every river, stream, +mountain and prairie, though the settlements had brought many changes, +and on the way to the Ohio he met several acquaintances. + +"It would be of no interest to tell of our journey, though we had more +than one adventure. The first place we visited was the little town of +Woodvale, so familiar to Mul-tal-la, and which had grown to that extent +that it had taken a new name. + +"There we found George and Victor Shelton, almost in middle life, both +married and among the leading citizens. They were filled with joy to +see Mul-tal-la, and did all they could to make our visit pleasant. But +we had talked only a little while when we were grieved to learn that +Deerfoot, who had moved to the west of the Mississippi, had been dead a +good many years. Not only that, but the manner of his death was the +saddest of which I had ever heard. (See "The Last War Trail.") + +"We stayed for several weeks in Ohio and met many old friends of the +Shawanoe. The one whom I best remember was Simon Kenton, who had great +fame as a hunter, and who had always been a close comrade of Deerfoot. +He was an old man when I saw him, but as strong and active as many who +had lived only half his years. He came to Woodvale the night before we +left on our return and stayed with Victor Shelton. His eyes filled with +tears when he spoke of Deerfoot, and said that the memory of the brave, +blameless life he lived in all circumstances had more to do with making +Kenton himself a Christian than did the camp meeting at which he +professed conversion. + +"Well, we set out for home, and though a part of the journey was made +in winter we met with no mishap. When we arrived, Mul-tal-la went +straight to his lodge to see his wife and children and I hurried to my +home, where I knew the chief had long expected me. I was greatly +relieved to find him and my mother well. + +"When I came into my father's presence, and before I had time to do +more than speak my pleasure, he raised his hand as a command for me to +keep silent. + +"'I know what you would say, but you need not tell me. Deerfoot has +been here and told me all.' + +"'But Deerfoot is dead,' I replied; 'that cannot be.' + +"'Did I not say he has visited me since you were gone, and told me +all?' + +"And then, forbidding me to open my lips, he related the full story of +Deerfoot's death. He gave the particulars, and was not wrong in the +slightest one. The chief need not have forbidden me to speak, for I +could not say a word for a long time afterward. He told me nothing +more. I cannot explain it." + +(Possibly psychologists may find the explanation of this remarkable +fact in mental telepathy, but how shall we explain the still more +extraordinary statement that follows?) + +"My mother had grown old and feeble and died a few months after I came +home. I noticed that father stopped going to the elevation beyond the +village and looking toward the rising sun for the coming of Deerfoot. +Nor did he seem to wish to speak of him, though I know the Shawanoe was +much in his thoughts. The chief gradually failed, and when the weather +grew cold he did not leave his lodge. + +"He and I lived together. I gave him affectionate attention and did not +let him lack for comfort. Others often visited him, for the Blackfeet +could not forget that he had been one of their greatest war chiefs. Our +lodge was not fashioned like the others. One side was the face of a +large rock, against which we always kindled the fire. At each of the +opposite two corners was a strong post. These were connected at the +tops by a horizontal beam and from each post was stretched another +beam, whose farther end rested on the rock. This and the three beams +gave support for the framework of the roof, which was made of the +boughs of trees. The sides and walls were of thick bark lined with +buffalo robes. This made the square room below free of all supports or +posts. My bed of furs was at one side and that of my father opposite. +An opening in the roof, where it joined the rock and exactly over the +fire, gave an outlet for the smoke. + +"One calm, cold night in autumn, after I had piled a deal of wood on +the blaze and seen that my father was warmly wrapped in furs and +sleeping comfortably, I lay down and fell asleep almost at once. It +could not have been long afterward that I was awakened by the sound of +people talking together. At first I thought they were outside the +lodge, but the fire was burning so bright that it was like noonday +within and I saw that the two persons who were conversing were standing +only a few paces from me. + +"One was Chief Taggarak, my father. His face was turned partly away and +toward me and there could be no mistake as to him. The other's back and +one shoulder hid his features, but something familiar in his appearance +and the sound of his voice struck me. While I was looking and listening +he shifted his position and I saw his face. + +"_It was Deerfoot the Shawanoe!_ + +[Illustration: "It Was Deerfoot, The Shawanoe."] + +"No one who had ever seen that Indian youth could possibly make an +error. I never looked upon such comely features or such a graceful +form, nor did I ever listen to so musical a voice. Like a person in a +dream, I felt no special surprise at seeing before me a person who had +died years before. + +"I studied him from head to foot. One of the first things I noticed was +that the stained eagle feathers, which he always used to wear in his +hair, were not there, nor did he have his knife at his girdle nor was +his rifle in his hand. I don't suppose they have need of such things in +heaven. + +"During this talk between Deerfoot and my father I did not speak or +rise to my feet. I expected the Shawanoe to say something to me and I +had no wish to break in upon the talk. They spent ten or fifteen +minutes thus, and then Deerfoot took the hand of my father, pressed it +warmly and turned to go. As he did so, he seemed for the first time to +see me. He stopped, looked down, smiled and uttered my name. Then he +checked himself, walked to the corner of the lodge, drew aside the +buffalo robe which served as a door and passed out into the night. + +"My father stood for a minute looking after him, and then, with a +glowing face, turned to me: + +"'Did you see him?' + +"'I did, and heard his voice.' + +"'You lost nothing of what he said to me?' + +"'Not a word.' + +"'Tell them to no one. Now sleep.' + +"It was a long time before I closed my eyes, and when I did so the +wonderful words that had fallen from the lips of Deerfoot were in my +ears. To me the strangest part of this strange experience is that which +followed. When morning came I found I could not remember a syllable +that the Shawanoe had said. I spoke to my father, and he talked of the +visit of Deerfoot as he would have talked of the visit of one of our +own Blackfeet. I told him I had forgotten the Shawanoe's words and +asked him to tell them to me again. He replied that God did not wish me +to remember them and he denied my request, which I respected him too +much ever to repeat. + +"Chief Taggarak lived several years longer. I have tried many times to +recall the words spoken by Deerfoot when he visited my father, but I +have never succeeded in bringing back a single one of them." + + +[THE END.] + + + + + +THE + +Famous Standard Juveniles + +Published by +THE JOHN C. WINSTON CO. +Philadelphia + +EDWARD S. ELLIS + +Edward S. Ellis, the popular writer of boys' books, is a native of +Ohio, where he was born somewhat more than a half-century ago. His +father was a famous hunter and rifle shot, and it was doubtless his +exploits and those of his associates, with their tales of adventure +which gave the son his taste for the breezy backwoods and for depicting +the stirring life of the early settlers on the frontier. + +Mr. Ellis began writing at an early age and his work was acceptable +from the first. His parents removed to New Jersey while he was a boy +and he was graduated from the State Normal School and became a member +of the faculty while still in his teens. He was afterward principal of +the Trenton High School, a trustee and then superintendent of schools. +By that time his services as a writer had become so pronounced that he +gave his entire attention to literature. He was an exceptionally +successful teacher and wrote a number of text-books for schools, all of +which met with high favor. For these and his historical productions, +Princeton College conferred upon him the degree of Master of Arts. + +The high moral character, the clean, manly tendencies and the admirable +literary style of Mr. Ellis' stories have made him as popular on the +other side of the Atlantic as in this country. A leading paper remarked +some time since, that no mother need hesitate to place in the hands of +her boy any book written by Mr. Ellis. They are found in the leading +Sunday-school libraries, where, as may well be believed, they are in +wide demand and do much good by their sound, wholesome lessons which +render them as acceptable to parents as to their children. Nearly all +of the Ellis books published by The John C. Winston Company are +reissued in London, and many have been translated into other languages. +Mr. Ellis is a writer of varied accomplishments, and, in addition to +his stories, is the author of historical works, of a number of pieces +of popular music, and has made several valuable inventions. Mr. Ellis +is in the prime of his mental and physical powers, and great as have +been the merits of his past achievements, there is reason to look for +more brilliant productions from his pen in the near future. + + +DEERFOOT SERIES +3 vols. By EDWARD S. ELLIS $3.00 +Hunters of the Ozark The Last War Trail +Camp in the Mountains + +LOG CABIN SERIES +3 vols. By EDWARD S. ELLIS $3.00 +Lost Trail Footprints in the Forest +Camp-Fire and Wigwam + +BOY PIONEER SERIES +3 vols. By EDWARD S. ELLIS $3.00 +Ned in the Block-House Ned on the River +Ned in the Woods + +THE NORTHWEST SERIES +3 vols. By EDWARD S. ELLIS $3.00 +Two Boys in Wyoming Cowmen and Rustlers +A Strange Craft and its Wonderful Voyage + +BOONE AND KENTON SERIES +3 vols. By EDWARD S. ELLIS $3.00 +Shod with Silence In the Days of the Pioneers +Phantom of the River + +WAR CHIEF SERIES +3 vols. By EDWARD S. ELLIS $3.00 +Red Eagle Blazing Arrow +Iron Heart, War Chief of the Iroquois + +THE NEW DEERFOOT SERIES +3 vols. By EDWARD S. ELLIS $3.00 +Deerfoot in the Forest Deerfoot on the Prairie +Deerfoot in the Mountains + +TRUE GRIT SERIES +3 vols. By EDWARD S. ELLIS $3.00 +Jim and Joe Dorsey, the Young Inventor +Secret of Coffin Island + +GREAT AMERICAN SERIES +2 vols. By EDWARD S. ELLIS $2.00 +Teddy and Towser; or, Early Days in California +Up the Forked River + +COLONIAL SERIES +3 vols. By EDWARD S. ELLIS $3.00 +An American King The Cromwell of Virginia +The Last Emperor of the Old Dominion + +FOREIGN ADVENTURE SERIES +3 vols. By EDWARD S. ELLIS $3.00 +Lost in the Forbidden Land River and Jungle +The Hunt of the White Elephant + +PADDLE YOUR OWN CANOE SERIES +3 vols. By EDWARD S. ELLIS $3.00 +The Forest Messengers The Mountain Star +Queen of the Clouds + +THE ARIZONA SERIES +3 vols. By EDWARD S. ELLIS $3.00 +Off the Reservation Trailing Geronimo +The Round Up + +OVERLAND SERIES +2 vols. By EDWARD S. ELLIS $2.00 +Alden, the Pony Express Rider Alden Among the Indians + +THE CATAMOUNT CAMP SERIES +2 vols. By EDWARD S. ELLIS $2.00 +Captain of the Camp Catamount Camp + +THE FLYING BOYS SERIES +2 vols. By EDWARD S. ELLIS $2.00 +The Flying Boys in the Sky The Flying Boys to the Rescue + +Sent Postpaid on Receipt of Price + +THE JOHN C. WINSTON CO., _Publishers_ +WINSTON BUILDING PHILADELPHIA + + + + +NOTABLE NOVELS _and_ +GIFT BOOKS OF VERSE +_BY_ JOHN TROTWOOD MOORE + + +JACK BALLINGTON, FORESTER + +The story concerns the fortunes of Jack Ballington, who, on account of +his apparent lack of fighting qualities, seems to be in danger of +losing his material heritage and the girl he loves, but in the stirring +crisis he measures up to the traditions of his forefathers. + + "Will captivate by its humor, set all the heart strings to + vibrating by its pathos, flood one's being in the great surge of + patriotism ... a story that vastly enriches American + fiction."--_Albany Times-Union._ + +12 mo. Cloth. 341 pages +Price $1.20 Net. Postage 13 cents + + +THE BISHOP OF COTTONTOWN + +A STORY OF THE TENNESSEE VALLEY + +Love, pathos and real humor run through the book in delightful measure. +Over all is shed the light of the "Old Bishop," endearing himself to +every reader by his gentleness, his strength and his uncynical +knowledge of the world which he finds so good to live in. 31 editions +have already been sold. + +12mo. Cloth. 606 pages +Price $1.50 Postpaid + + +UNCLE WASH: HIS STORIES + +A book of stories centering about the character of "Uncle Wash," which +even in the brief time since its publication has achieved a large and +notable success among all classes of readers. Many editions have +already been sold. + + "One of the few great books."--_Rochester Union and Advertiser._ + + "A mine of humor and pathos."--_Omaha World-Herald._ + +12mo. Cloth. 329 pages +Price $1.50 Postpaid + + +A SUMMER HYMNAL + +A ROMANCE OF TENNESSEE + +The story of Edward Ballington and his love affairs with two delightful +girls in charming contrast, forms the plot of this captivating love +story. On the threads of this narrative is woven the story of a blind +man who meets the catastrophe of sudden darkness in a spirit of +bravery, sweetness and resignation which commands the love and respect +of every reader. + +12mo. Cloth. 332 pages +Price $1.25 Postpaid + + +SONGS AND STORIES FROM TENNESSEE + +In truth Mr. Moore, in this collection of songs and stories of Dixie +Land, has created a work that will live long in the traditions of the +South and longer in the hearts of his readers. One has only to read +"Ole Mistis," the first story in this collection, to feel the power of +Mr. Moore's genius. It is at once the finest story of a horse race ever +written, a powerful love story and most touchingly pathetic narrative +of the faith and devotion of a little slave. + +12mo. Cloth. 358 pages +Price $1.25 Postpaid + + +THE OLD COTTON GIN + +The "Old Cotton Gin" breathes the passionate patriotism of the South, +her dearest sentiments, her pathos and regrets, her splendid progress +and her triumphant future. This poem is a popular favorite throughout +the South, and has been adopted officially in some states. The author +is one of her truest sons. All the pages of the book are decorated with +original drawings, including seven exceedingly fine full-page +illustrations. + +Bound in Imported Silk Cloth. Size 6-1/2 x 9-1/2 inches +Price $1.00 Net. Postage 10 cents + + +ALL OF THE ABOVE BOOKS ARE HANDSOMELY +ILLUSTRATED BY WELL-KNOWN ARTISTS + + +THE JOHN C. WINSTON CO., _Publishers_ +WINSTON BUILDING PHILADELPHIA + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Deerfoot in The Mountains, by Edward S. Ellis + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK DEERFOOT IN THE MOUNTAINS *** + +***** This file should be named 25334.txt or 25334.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/5/3/3/25334/ + +Produced by David Edwards and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was +produced from images generously made available by The +Internet Archive) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |